Backhoe Loader310j And 310sjengines

Backhoe Loader

310J and 310SJ

Engines 4045DT060,

4045HT054 and 4045TT094

OPERATOR'S MANUAL

310J and 310SJ Backhoe Loaders

Engines 4045DT060, 4045HT054 and 4045TT094

OMT210365 ISSUE B3 (ENGLISH)

CALIFORNIA

Proposition 65 Warning

Diesel engine exhaust and some of its constituents are known to the State of California to cause cancer, birth defects, and other reproductive harm.

If this product contains a gasoline engine:

WARNING

The engine exhaust from this product contains chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer, birth defects or other reproductive harm.

The State of California requires the above two warnings.

Additional Proposition 65 Warnings can be found in this manual.

Worldwide Construction

And Forestry Division

LITHO IN U.S.A.

Introduction

Foreword

READ THIS MANUAL carefully to learn how to operate and service your machine correctly. Failure to do so could result in personal injury or equipment damage.

This manual and safety signs on your machine may also be available in other languages. (See your John Deere dealer to order.)

THIS MANUAL SHOULD BE CONSIDERED a permanent part of your machine and should remain with the machine when you sell it.

MEASUREMENTS in this manual are given in both metric and customary U.S. unit equivalents. Use only correct replacement parts and fasteners. Metric and inch fasteners may require a specific metric or inch wrench.

RIGHT-HAND AND LEFT-HAND sides are determined by facing in the direction of forward travel.

WRITE PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION NUMBERS (P.I.N.) in the Machine Numbers section. Accurately record all the numbers to help in tracing the machine should it be stolen. Your dealer also needs these numbers when you order parts. File the identification numbers in a secure place off the machine.

WARRANTY is provided as part of John Deere's support program for customers who operate and maintain their equipment as described in this manual. The warranty is explained on the warranty certificate or statement which you should have received from your dealer.

This warranty provides you the assurance that John

Deere will back its products where defects appear within the warranty period. In some circumstances, John Deere also provides field improvements, often without charge to the customer, even if the product is out of warranty.

Should the equipment be abused, or modified to change its performance beyond the original factory specifications, the warranty will become void and field improvements may be denied. Setting fuel delivery above specifications or otherwise overpowering machines will result in such action.

THE TIRE MANUFACTURER'S warranty supplied with your machine may not apply outside the U.S.

If you are not the original owner of this machine, it is in your interest to contact your local John Deere dealer to inform them of this unit's serial number. This will help John

Deere notify you of any issues or product improvements.

DX,IFC7 -19-03APR09-1/1

IMPORTANT

Warranty will not apply to engine and drivetrain failures resulting from unauthorized adjustments to this engine.

Unauthorized adjustments are in violation of the emissions regulations applicable to this engine and may result in substantial fines and penalties.

VD76477,000104D -19-27JUN12-1/1

020113

PN=2

Introduction

Emissions Control Warranty Statement—U.S. and Canada

VD76477,000104E -19-04JAN10-1/1

020113

PN=3

Introduction

Technical Information Feedback Form

We need your help to continually improve our technical publications. Please copy this page and FAX or mail your comments, ideas and improvements.

SEND TO:

John Deere Dubuque Works

18600 South John Deere Road

Attn: Publications, Dept. 324

Dubuque, IA 52004-0538

USA

FAX NUMBER:

1-563-589-5800 (USA)

Publication Number:

Page Number:

Ideas, Comments:

Name:

Phone:

Email Address:

THANK YOU!

TX,TM,FAX -19-03JUL01-1/1

020113

PN=4

Contents

Page

Safety—Safety And Operator Conveniences

Safety and Operator Convenience Features .....1-1-1

Safety—General Precautions

Recognize Safety Information ...........................1-2-1

Follow Safety Instructions..................................1-2-1

Operate Only If Qualified ...................................1-2-1

Wear Protective Equipment...............................1-2-2

Avoid Unauthorized Machine Modifications.......1-2-2

Inspect Machine ................................................1-2-2

Stay Clear of Moving Parts................................1-2-2

Avoid High-Pressure Oils ..................................1-2-3

Avoid High-Pressure Fluids ...............................1-2-3

Work In Ventilated Area.....................................1-2-4

Prevent Fires .....................................................1-2-4

Prevent Battery Explosions ...............................1-2-5

Handle Chemical Products Safely .....................1-2-5

Dispose of Waste Properly ................................1-2-5

Prepare for Emergencies...................................1-2-6

Clean Debris from Machine ...............................1-2-6

Safety—Operating Precautions

Use Steps and Handholds Correctly .................1-3-1

Start Only From Operator's Seat .......................1-3-1

Use and Maintain Seat Belt ...............................1-3-1

Prevent Unintended Machine Movement ..........1-3-1

Prevent Unintended Machine

Movement—If Equipped With Pilot

Controls.........................................................1-3-2

Avoid Work Site Hazards...................................1-3-2

Keep Riders Off Machine ..................................1-3-3

Avoid Backover Accidents .................................1-3-3

Avoid Machine Tipover ......................................1-3-3

Add and Operate Attachments Safely ...............1-3-4

Use Special Care When Operating ...................1-3-4

Operating or Traveling On Public Roads ...........1-3-4

Inspect and Maintain ROPS ..............................1-3-5

Safety—Maintenance Precautions

Park and Prepare for Service Safely .................1-4-1

Service Cooling System Safely .........................1-4-1

Remove Paint Before Welding or Heating.........1-4-2

Make Welding Repairs Safely ...........................1-4-2

Drive Metal Pins Safely .....................................1-4-2

Service Tires Safely...........................................1-4-3

Page

Safety—Safety Signs

Safety Signs ......................................................1-5-1

Safety Signs—Backhoe Coupler (If Equipped) ..1-5-3

Replace Safety Signs ........................................1-5-4

Operation—Operator’s Station

Pedals and Levers.............................................2-1-1

Pedals and Levers—If Equipped With

Pilot Controls.................................................2-1-1

Fire Extinguisher Location .................................2-1-1

Standard Display Monitor (SDM).......................2-1-2

Standard Display Functions...............................2-1-3

Anti-Theft Security System Configuration..........2-1-4

Anti-Theft Security System Operation ...............2-1-6

Standard Display Monitor

(SDM)—Normal Display................................2-1-7

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)

Monitor Messages.........................................2-1-8

Standard Display Monitor (SDM) Main Menu ....2-1-8

Standard Display Monitor (SDM) Main

Menu—Codes ...............................................2-1-9


Menu—Monitor............................................2-1-10


Menu—Job Timer........................................2-1-11


Menu—Settings...........................................2-1-11

Right-Side Console Functions .........................2-1-12

Controls—Steering Console ............................2-1-14

Pilot Control Enable/Disable Switch—If

Equipped .....................................................2-1-15

Pattern Select Switch—If Equipped.................2-1-15

Engine Speed Control Knob ............................2-1-16

Horn Button .....................................................2-1-16

Defroster, Heater, and Air Conditioner

Controls—If Equipped .................................2-1-17

Side Windows—Secondary Exits ....................2-1-18

Rear Windows .................................................2-1-18

Adjusting Seat .................................................2-1-19

Steering Wheel Tilt Lever—If Equipped ..........2-1-20

12-Volt Accessory Outlets ...............................2-1-21

Operation—Operating The Machine

Inspect Machine Daily Before Starting ..............2-2-1

Check Instruments Before Starting....................2-2-2

Engine Break-In Period .....................................2-2-3

Continued on next page

Original Instructions. All information, illustrations and specifications in this manual are based on the latest information available at the time of publication.

The right is reserved to make changes at any time without notice.

COPYRIGHT © 2013

DEERE & COMPANY

Moline, Illinois

All rights reserved.

A John Deere ILLUSTRUCTION ® Manual

Previous Editions

Copyright © 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2012

i

020113

PN=1

Page

Starting the Engine ............................................2-2-3

Starting Fluid—Cold Weather Start

Aid—If Equipped ...........................................2-2-4

Using Coolant Heater—If Equipped ..................2-2-5

Warm-Up ...........................................................2-2-5

Cold Weather Warm-Up ....................................2-2-6

Ride Control Operation—If Equipped ................2-2-6

Pilot Control Operation—If Equipped ................2-2-7

Driving the Machine...........................................2-2-7

Cruise Control....................................................2-2-9

Operating Stabilizers .........................................2-2-9

Operating Boom Lock......................................2-2-10

Operating Swing Lock .....................................2-2-11

Operating Swing Lock Pin ...............................2-2-11

Operating Backhoe—John Deere

Two-Lever Controls .....................................2-2-12

Operating Backhoe—Excavator

Two-Lever Controls .....................................2-2-13

Operating Backhoe—John Deere Pilot

Controls.......................................................2-2-14

Operating Backhoe—Excavator Pilot

Controls.......................................................2-2-15

Operating Extendible Dipperstick—If

Equipped .....................................................2-2-16

Operating Extendible Dipperstick With

Attachments ................................................2-2-17

Operating Extendible Dipperstick

Lock—If Equipped.......................................2-2-17

Operating Backhoe Auxiliary Hydraulic

Selective Flow Functions—If Equipped.......2-2-18

Operating Backhoe Auxiliary Hydraulic

Functions—If Equipped...............................2-2-19

Operating Hydraulic Thumb—If Equipped.......2-2-20

Operating Backhoe Coupler—If Equipped ......2-2-21

Operating Loader Coupler—If Equipped .........2-2-22

Operating Loader.............................................2-2-23

Operating Differential Lock ..............................2-2-24

Operating Mechanical Front Wheel

Drive (MFWD)—If Equipped .......................2-2-24

Lifting ...............................................................2-2-25

Parking the Machine........................................2-2-25

Loading Machine on a Trailer ..........................2-2-26

Towing .............................................................2-2-27

Maintenance—Machine

Diesel Fuel.........................................................3-1-1

Lubricity of Diesel Fuel ......................................3-1-1

Handling and Storing Diesel Fuel ......................3-1-2

Biodiesel Fuel ....................................................3-1-3

Testing Diesel Fuel ............................................3-1-4

Minimizing the Effect of Cold Weather

on Diesel Engines .........................................3-1-5

Alternative and Synthetic Lubricants .................3-1-6

Diesel Engine Break-In™ Oil.............................3-1-6

Diesel Engine Oil—Tier 2 and Stage II

Engines .........................................................3-1-7

Diesel Engine Oil and Filter Service

Intervals—Tier 2/Stage II Engine ..................3-1-8

Contents

Page

Diesel Engine Oil—Tier 3 and Stage III

A Engines......................................................3-1-9

Diesel Engine Oil and Filter Service

Intervals—Tier 3/Stage III A Engine ............3-1-10

Transmission, Axles, and Mechanical

Front Wheel Drive (MFWD) Oil ...................3-1-11

Hydraulic Oil ....................................................3-1-11

Grease.............................................................3-1-12

Heavy Duty Diesel Engine Coolant .................3-1-12

Drain Intervals for Diesel Engine Coolant........3-1-13

John Deere COOL-GARD™ II Coolant

Extender......................................................3-1-13

Supplemental Coolant Additives......................3-1-14

Operating in Warm Temperature Climates ......3-1-14

Additional Information About Diesel

Engine Coolants and John Deere

COOL-GARD™ II Coolant Extender ...........3-1-15

Testing Diesel Engine Coolant.........................3-1-16

Maintenance—Periodic Maintenance

Service Machine at Specified Intervals..............3-2-1

Check Hour Meter Regularly .............................3-2-1

Prepare Machine for Maintenance ....................3-2-1

Engine Identification ..........................................3-2-2

Loader Boom Service Lock ...............................3-2-5

Opening and Closing Engine Hood ...................3-2-5

Fuel Tank ...........................................................3-2-5

Fluid Analysis Program Test Kits and

3-Way Coolant Test Kit..................................3-2-6

Service Intervals ................................................3-2-7

Required Parts...................................................3-2-9

Maintenance—As Required

Check Tire Pressure ..........................................3-3-1

Tire Inflation Pressures......................................3-3-2

Check Wheel Fasteners ....................................3-3-4

Clean Cab Air Filters—If Equipped....................3-3-4

Drain Water and Sediment from Water

Separator ......................................................3-3-6

Drain Auxiliary Water Separator Fuel

Filter—If Equipped ........................................3-3-6

Clean or Replace Air Cleaner

Elements—Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine..............3-3-7

Clean or Replace Air Cleaner

Elements—Tier 2/Stage II Engine .................3-3-8

Grease MFWD Drive Shaft Splines—If

Equipped .......................................................3-3-8

Grease Non-Powered Front Wheel

Bearings—If Equipped ..................................3-3-9

Check Coolant .................................................3-3-10

Maintenance—Every 10 Hours or Daily

Check Hydraulic Reservoir Oil Level .................3-4-1

Check Engine Oil Level .....................................3-4-2

Check Coolant Level .........................................3-4-3

Inspect Fuel Water Sediment Bowls..................3-4-4

Grease Loader Pivots........................................3-4-5


ii

020113

PN=2

Page

Grease Multipurpose Bucket Pivots—If

Equipped .......................................................3-4-6

Grease Stabilizer Pivots and Cylinder Pins .......3-4-6

Grease Backhoe Boom, Crowd

Cylinders and Pivots .....................................3-4-7

Grease Backhoe Bucket Cylinder and Pivots....3-4-8

Grease Backhoe Swing Cylinder and Pivots .....3-4-8

Grease Loader Quick Coupler—If Equipped .....3-4-9

Grease Non-Powered Front Axle

Steering Pivots—If Equipped ........................3-4-9

Grease MFWD Front Axle and

Universal Joints—If Equipped .......................3-4-9

Grease Backhoe Coupler Mechanical

Jack—If Equipped .......................................3-4-10

Grease Front Axle Pivot Pin ............................3-4-10

Maintenance—Every 50 Hours

Check Transmission Oil Level ...........................3-5-1

Grease Backhoe Coupler Fittings—If

Equipped .......................................................3-5-1

Maintenance—Initial Service—250 Hours

Change Engine Break-In Oil and

Replace Filter ................................................3-6-1


Check MFWD Planetary Housing

Oil—If Equipped ............................................3-7-1

Check MFWD Axle Oil Level—If Equipped .......3-7-1

Check Battery Electrolyte Level and Terminals ..3-7-2

Check Rear Axle Oil Level.................................3-7-4

Take Engine Oil Sample ....................................3-7-4


Check Air Intake Hose.......................................3-8-1

Check Boom-to-Dipperstick Pin Bolt Torque .....3-8-1

Drain Fuel Tank Water and Sediment................3-8-2

Change Engine Oil and Replace Filter ..............3-8-3

Replace Primary and Final Fuel

Filters—Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine...................3-8-4

Replace Fuel Filter—Tier 2/Stage II Engine ......3-8-5

Replace Auxiliary Water Separator

Fuel Filter—If Equipped ................................3-8-5

Clean Engine Crankcase Ventilation

Tube—Tier 2/Stage II Engine ........................3-8-6

Clean Engine Crankcase Ventilation

Tube—Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine ....................3-8-6

Take Fluid Samples ...........................................3-8-6


Clean, Pack, and Adjust Non-Powered

Front Wheel Bearings—If Equipped..............3-9-1

Replace Hydraulic Reservoir Breather ..............3-9-2

Replace Engine Air Cleaner

Elements—Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine..............3-9-3

Replace Engine Air Cleaner

Elements—Tier 2/Stage II Engine .................3-9-4

Contents

Page

Replace Cab Air Filters......................................3-9-4

Inspect Belt........................................................3-9-5

Replace Hydraulic Oil Filter ...............................3-9-6

Replace Fuel Breather.......................................3-9-6

Change Transmission Oil and Replace Filter ....3-9-7

Check Coolant ...................................................3-9-8


Adjust Engine Valve Lash (Clearance) ............3-10-1

Change Hydraulic Reservoir Oil ......................3-10-1

Change MFWD Planetary Housing

Oil—If Equipped ..........................................3-10-2

Change MFWD Front Axle Housing

Oil—If Equipped ..........................................3-10-2

Change Rear Axle and Planetary

Housing Oil..................................................3-10-3

Inspect and Clean Hydraulic Reservoir

Fill Screen ...................................................3-10-4


Draining the Cooling System—Tier

3/Stage IIIA Engine .....................................3-11-1

Draining the Cooling System—Tier

2/Stage II Engine.........................................3-11-2

Filling the Cooling System—Tier

3/Stage IIIA Engine .....................................3-11-3

Filling the Cooling System—Tier

2/Stage II Engine.........................................3-11-4

Miscellaneous—Machine

External Service Brake Inspection.....................4-1-1

Check and Adjust Backhoe Boom Lock ............4-1-2

Inspecting and Cleaning Dusty

Secondary and Primary Element ..................4-1-3

Check Receiver-Dryer—If Equipped .................4-1-3

Checking Coolant Hoses and Radiator .............4-1-4

Do Not Service or Adjust Injection

Nozzles or Injection Pump ............................4-1-5

Precautions for Alternator and Regulator ..........4-1-5

Using Battery Charger .......................................4-1-6

Using Booster Batteries—12-Volt System .........4-1-6

Handling, Checking and Servicing

Batteries Carefully.........................................4-1-7

Replacing Batteries ...........................................4-1-8

Removing Batteries ...........................................4-1-9

JDLink™ Machine Monitoring System

(MMS)—If Equipped......................................4-1-9

Replacing Fuses................................................4-1-9

Remove and Install Halogen Bulb ...................4-1-13

Checking Starting System ...............................4-1-14

Fluid Sampling Test Ports—If Equipped ..........4-1-14

Changing Loader Buckets ...............................4-1-15

Adding Front Counterweights ..........................4-1-16

Reversing Stabilizer Feet ................................4-1-16

Adding Liquid Ballast to Front Tires.................4-1-17

Welding On Machine .......................................4-1-17

Checking Ride Control Accumulator—If

Equipped .....................................................4-1-18


iii

020113

PN=3

Page

Discharge Ride Control System

Hydraulic Pressure—If Equipped ................4-1-19

Discharge Pilot Control System

Hydraulic Pressure—If Equipped ................4-1-19

Lowering Boom Without Electrical

Power—For Machines With Pilot Controls ..4-1-20

Check Park Brake............................................4-1-20

Bleeding Fuel System......................................4-1-21

Brake Bleeding Procedure...............................4-1-22

Service Recommendations For

Snap-To-Connect (STC®) Fittings ..............4-1-24

Adjusting Pilot Control Wrist Rest—If

Equipped .....................................................4-1-25

Toe-In Check and Adjust .................................4-1-26

Installing Teeth on Backhoe Bucket.................4-1-27

Do Not Service Control Valves,

Cylinders, Pumps or Motors........................4-1-27

Keep ROPS Installed Properly ........................4-1-28

Hardware Torque Specifications......................4-1-28

Unified Inch Bolt and Screw Torque Values.....4-1-29

Metric Bolt and Screw Torque Values..............4-1-30

Inspect Loader Boom Service Lock.................4-1-30

Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout

Operational Checkout Procedure ......................4-2-1

Miscellaneous—Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting Procedure ...............................4-3-1

Engine ...............................................................4-3-2

Electrical System ...............................................4-3-5

Steering System ................................................4-3-9

Hydraulic System.............................................4-3-10

Transmission ...................................................4-3-12

MFWD .............................................................4-3-12

Rear Axle.........................................................4-3-13

Air Conditioning ...............................................4-3-14

Miscellaneous—Storage

Prepare Machine for Storage ............................4-4-1

Monthly Storage Procedure...............................4-4-1

Miscellaneous—Machine Numbers

Record Product Identification Number (PIN) .....4-5-1

Record Engine Serial Number...........................4-5-1

Record Transmission Serial Number.................4-5-1

Record Rear Axle Housing Serial Number ........4-5-2

Record Mechanical Front Wheel Drive

(MFWD) Front Axle Housing Serial

Number—If Equipped....................................4-5-2

Keep Proof of Ownership ..................................4-5-2

Keep Machines Secure .....................................4-5-3

Miscellaneous—Specifications

Travel Speeds ...................................................4-6-1

Backhoe Loader Drain and Refill Capacities .....4-6-1

310J Backhoe Loader Dimensions....................4-6-2

310J Backhoe Loader Specifications ................4-6-6

310J Backhoe Loader Weight ...........................4-6-7

310J Buckets .....................................................4-6-7

Contents

Page

310J Backhoe Loader Lifting

Capacities—Standard Dipperstick ................4-6-8


Capacities—Extendible Dipperstick

(Retracted) ....................................................4-6-8



(Extended).....................................................4-6-9

310SJ Dimensions...........................................4-6-10

310SJ Backhoe Loader Weight .......................4-6-14

310SJ Buckets.................................................4-6-15

310SJ Backhoe Loader Lifting

Capacities—Standard Dipperstick ..............4-6-15



(Retracted) ..................................................4-6-16



(Extended)...................................................4-6-16

iv

020113

PN=4

Safety—Safety And Operator Conveniences

Safety and Operator Convenience Features

1

2

16

15

3

17

5

4

12

13

6

14

10

7

9

8

11

T145296

Please remember, the

operator

is the key to preventing accidents.

1.

Headlights/Taillights.

Two front halogen driving/work lights and two rear halogen work lights.

2.

Signal/Warning Lights.

Roof mounted turning signal lights and warning lights for on-road use.

3.

ROPS Protection.

Certified rollover protection structure surrounds the operator. Integral roof provides overhead protection.

4.

Seat Position Sensor.

An audio/visual warning alerts operator when transmission control lever (TCL) is in forward/reverse and the seat turned toward the backhoe position.

5.

Interior Rearview Mirror.

Offers the operator a view of activity behind him.

6.

Handholds.

Large and conveniently placed handholds, make it easy to enter or exit the operator's station.

7.

Loader Boom Service Lock.

Provided for working on or around this machine with the boom raised.

8.

Engine Fan Guard.

A secondary engine fan guard inside engine compartment encloses rotating fan blades.

9.

Bypass Start Protection.

Shielding over the starter solenoid helps prevent dangerous bypass starting.

10.

Ground-Level Fueling, Daily Service Checks.

Ground-level fueling feature eliminates the need to climb on the machine to fuel it.

11.

Steps.

Wide, skid-resistant steps provide excellent footing for getting in/out of operator's station.

12.

Independent Parking/Secondary Brake.

Independent, electrically controlled, parking brake electrically engages when the engine is stopped.

13.

Neutral Start.

The machine will not move until the

Transmission Control Lever (TCL) is cycled back to neutral and the park brake is released, regardless of

TCL position at startup.

14.

Backup Alarm.

Alerts bystanders when the machine is shifted into reverse.

15.

Seat Belt Retractors.

Seat belt retractors help keep belts clean and convenient to use.

16.

Exceptional Visibility.

Views to either side and front or rear working tools are unrestricted.

17.

Operator Manual Holder.

A sealed manual holder keeps manual clean and dry.

VD76477,000126F -19-14JUL09-1/1

1-1-1

020113

PN=9

Safety—General Precautions

Recognize Safety Information

This is the safety alert symbol. When you see this symbol on your machine or in this manual, be alert for the potential of personal injury.

Follow the precautions and safe operating practices highlighted by this symbol.

A signal word — DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION — is used with the safety alert symbol. DANGER identifies the most serious hazards.

On your machine, DANGER signs are red in color,

WARNING signs are orange, and CAUTION signs are yellow. DANGER and WARNING signs are located near specific hazards. General precautions are on CAUTION labels.

TX03679,00016CC -19-05FEB10-1/1

Follow Safety Instructions

Carefully read all safety messages in this manual and on your machine safety signs. Keep safety signs in good condition. Replace missing or damaged safety signs. Be sure new equipment components and repair parts include the current safety signs. Replacement safety signs are available from your John Deere dealer.

There can be additional safety information contained on parts and components sourced from suppliers that is not reproduced in this operator's manual.

Learn how to operate the machine and how to use controls properly. Do not let anyone operate without instruction.

Keep your machine in proper working condition.

Unauthorized modifications to the machine may impair the function and/or safety and affect machine life.

If you do not understand any part of this manual and need assistance, contact your John Deere dealer.

DX,READ -19-16JUN09-1/1

Operate Only If Qualified

Do not operate this machine unless the operator's manual has been read carefully, and you have been qualified by supervised training and instruction.

Operator should be familiar with the job site and surroundings before operating. Try all controls and machine functions with the machine in an open area before starting to work.

Know and observe all safety rules that may apply to every work situation and work site.

TX03679,00016FA -19-03JAN07-1/1

1-2-1

020113

PN=10

Safety—General Precautions

Wear Protective Equipment

Guard against injury from flying pieces or metal or debris; wear goggles or safety glasses.

Wear close fitting clothing and safety equipment appropriate to the job.

Operating equipment safely requires the full attention of the operator. Do not wear radio or music headphones while operating machine.

Prolonged exposure to loud noise can cause impairment or loss of hearing. Wear suitable hearing protection such as earmuffs or earplugs to protect against objectionable or uncomfortable loud noises. Radio or music headphones are not suitable to use for hearing protection.

OUT4001,0000570 -19-12FEB10-1/1

Avoid Unauthorized Machine Modifications

John Deere recommends using only genuine John Deere replacement parts to ensure machine performance.

Never substitute genuine John Deere parts with alternate parts not intended for the application as these can create hazardous situations or hazardous performance.

Non-John Deere parts, or any damage or failures resulting from their use are not covered by any John Deere warranty.

Modifications of this machine, or addition of unapproved products or attachments, may affect machine stability or reliability, and may create a hazard for the operator or others near the machine. The installer of any modification which may affect the electronic controls of this machine is responsible for establishing that the modification does not adversely affect the machine or its performance.

Always contact an authorized dealer before making machine modifications that change the intended use, weight or balance of the machine, or that alter machine controls, performance or reliability.

AM40430,00000A9 -19-20AUG09-1/1

Inspect Machine

Inspect machine carefully each day by walking around it before starting.

Keep all guards and shields in good condition and properly installed. Fix damage and replace worn or broken parts immediately. Pay special attention to hydraulic hoses and electrical wiring.

TX03679,0001734 -19-08JAN08-1/1

Stay Clear of Moving Parts

Entanglements in moving parts can cause serious injury.

Stop engine before examining, adjusting or maintaining any part of machine with moving parts.

Keep guards and shields in place. Replace any guard or shield that has been removed for access as soon as service or repair is complete.

1-2-2

TX03679,00016D2 -19-08JAN08-1/1

020113

PN=11


Avoid High-Pressure Oils

This machine uses a high-pressure hydraulic system.

Escaping oil under pressure can penetrate the skin causing serious injury.

Never search for leaks with your hands.

Protect hands.

Use a piece of cardboard to find location of escaping oil.

Stop engine and relieve pressure before disconnecting lines or working on hydraulic system.

If hydraulic oil penetrates your skin, see a doctor immediately. Injected oil must be removed surgically within hours or gangrene may result.

Contact a knowledgeable medical source or the Deere & Company

Medical Department in Moline, Illinois, U.S.A.

TX03679,00016D3 -19-03NOV08-1/1

Avoid High-Pressure Fluids

Inspect hydraulic hoses periodically – at least once per year – for leakage, kinking, cuts, cracks, abrasion, blisters, corrosion, exposed wire braid or any other signs of wear or damage.

Replace worn or damaged hose assemblies immediately with John Deere approved replacement parts.

Escaping fluid under pressure can penetrate the skin causing serious injury.

Avoid the hazard by relieving pressure before disconnecting hydraulic or other lines. Tighten all connections before applying pressure.

Search for leaks with a piece of cardboard. Protect hands and body from high-pressure fluids.

If an accident occurs, see a doctor immediately. Any fluid injected into the skin must be surgically removed within a few hours or gangrene may result. Doctors unfamiliar with this type of injury should reference a knowledgeable medical source. Such information is available in

English from Deere & Company Medical Department in

Moline, Illinois, U.S.A., by calling 1-800-822-8262 or +1

309-748-5636.

DX,FLUID -19-12OCT11-1/1

1-2-3

020113

PN=12


Work In Ventilated Area

Engine exhaust fumes can cause sickness or death. If it is necessary to run an engine in an enclosed area, remove the exhaust fumes from the area with an exhaust pipe extension.

If you do not have an exhaust pipe extension, open the doors and get outside air into the area.

Prevent Fires

Handle Fuel Safely:

Store flammable fluids away from fire hazards. Never refuel machine while smoking or when near sparks or flame.

Clean Machine Regularly:

Keep trash, debris, grease and oil from accumulating in engine compartment, around fuel lines, hydraulic lines, exhaust components and electrical wiring. Never store oily rags or flammable materials inside a machine compartment.

Maintain Hoses and Wiring:

Replace hydraulic hoses immediately if they begin to leak, and clean up any oil spills. Examine electrical wiring and connectors frequently for damage.

Keep A Fire Extinguisher Available:

Always keep a multi-purpose fire extinguisher on or near the machine.

Know how to use extinguisher properly.

T133553 —UN—07SEP00

T133554 —UN—07SEP00

DX,AIR -19-17FEB99-1/1

TX03679,00016F5 -19-26JUN09-1/1

1-2-4

020113

PN=13


Prevent Battery Explosions

Keep sparks, lighted matches, and open flame away from the top of battery. Battery gas can explode.

Never check battery charge by placing a metal object across the posts. Use a volt-meter or hydrometer.

Do not charge a frozen battery; it may explode. Warm battery to 16°C (60°F).

Handle Chemical Products Safely

Direct exposure to hazardous chemicals can cause serious injury. Potentially hazardous chemicals used with

John Deere equipment include such items as lubricants, coolants, paints, and adhesives.

A Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) provides specific details on chemical products: physical and health hazards, safety procedures, and emergency response techniques.

Check the MSDS before you start any job using a hazardous chemical. That way you will know exactly what the risks are and how to do the job safely. Then follow procedures and recommended equipment.

(See your John Deere dealer for MSDS’s on chemical products used with John Deere equipment.)

Dispose of Waste Properly

Improperly disposing of waste can threaten the environment and ecology. Potentially harmful waste used with John Deere equipment include such items as oil, fuel, coolant, brake fluid, filters, and batteries.

Use leakproof containers when draining fluids. Do not use food or beverage containers that may mislead someone into drinking from them.

Do not pour waste onto the ground, down a drain, or into any water source.

Air conditioning refrigerants escaping into the air can damage the Earth’s atmosphere. Government regulations may require a certified air conditioning service center to recover and recycle used air conditioning refrigerants.

Inquire on the proper way to recycle or dispose of waste from your local environmental or recycling center, or from your John Deere dealer.

1-2-5

DX,SPARKS -19-03MAR93-1/1

DX,MSDS,NA -19-03MAR93-1/1

DX,DRAIN -19-03MAR93-1/1

020113

PN=14


Prepare for Emergencies

Be prepared if a fire starts.

Keep a first aid kit and fire extinguisher handy.

Keep emergency numbers for doctors, ambulance service, hospital, and fire department near your telephone.

Clean Debris from Machine

Keep engine compartment, radiator, batteries, hydraulic lines, exhaust components, fuel tank, and operator's station clean and free of debris.

Clean any oil spills or fuel spills on machine surfaces.

Temperature in engine compartment may go up immediately after engine is stopped. BE ON GUARD

FOR FIRES DURING THIS PERIOD.

Open access door(s) to cool the engine faster, and clean engine compartment.

DX,FIRE2 -19-03MAR93-1/1

OUT4001,00000E3 -19-20AUG09-1/1

1-2-6

020113

PN=15

Safety—Operating Precautions

Use Steps and Handholds Correctly

Prevent falls by facing the machine when you get on and off. Maintain 3-point contact with steps and handrails.

Never use machine controls as handholds.

Use extra care when mud, snow, or moisture present slippery conditions. Keep steps clean and free of grease or oil. Never jump when exiting machine. Never mount or dismount a moving machine.

Start Only From Operator's Seat

Avoid unexpected machine movement. Start engine only while sitting in operator's seat. Ensure all controls and working tools are in proper position for a parked machine.

Never attempt to start engine from the ground. Do not attempt to start engine by shorting across the starter solenoid terminals.

TX03679,00016F2 -19-12FEB07-1/1

TX03679,0001799 -19-22APR10-1/1

Use and Maintain Seat Belt

Use seat belt when operating machine

. Remember to fasten seat belt when loading and unloading from trucks and during other uses.

Examine seat belt frequently. Be sure webbing is not cut or torn. Replace seat belt immediately if any part is damaged or does not function properly.

The complete seat belt assembly should be replaced every three years, regardless of appearance.

Prevent Unintended Machine Movement

Always set the park lock brake switch to the ON position (1) before leaving the operator's seat for any reason

.

Be careful not to accidentally actuate steering, travel or other controls. Engage park brake and lower work equipment to the ground during work interruptions.

Stop the engine before allowing anyone to approach the machine. Follow proper parking procedures before leaving the operator's station.

1— ON Position

1

P

TX03679,00016DD -19-19MAR07-1/1

VD76477,0001204 -19-02FEB07-1/1

1-3-1

020113

PN=16

Safety—Operating Precautions

Prevent Unintended Machine Movement—If

Equipped With Pilot Controls

Be careful not to accidentally actuate control levers when co-workers are present. Always lock hydraulics on backhoe during work interruptions. Lock hydraulics before allowing anyone to approach machine.

Pilot Enable Switch

VD76477,0001200 -19-05SEP12-1/1

Avoid Work Site Hazards

Avoid contact with gas lines, buried cables and water lines. Call utility line location services to identify all underground utilities before starting work.

Prepare work site properly

. Avoid operating near structures or objects that could fall onto the machine. Clear away debris that could move unexpectedly if run over.

Avoid boom or attachment contact with overhead obstacles or overhead electrical lines.

Never move any part of machine or load closer than 3 m (10 ft) plus twice the line insulator length to overhead wires.

Keep bystanders clear at all times.

Keep bystanders away from raised booms, attachments, and unsupported loads. Avoid swinging or raising booms, attachments, or loads over or near personnel. Use barricades or a signal person to keep vehicles and pedestrians away. Use a signal person if moving machine in congested areas or where visibility is restricted. Always keep signal person in view. Coordinate hand signals before starting machine.

Operate only on solid footing

with strength sufficient to support machine. Be especially alert working near embankments or excavations.

Avoid working under over-hanging embankments or stockpiles

that could collapse on machine.

Reduce machine speed

when operating with tool on or near ground when obstacles may be hidden (e.g., during snow removal or clearing mud, dirt, etc.). At high speeds hitting obstacles (rocks, uneven concrete or manholes) can cause a sudden stop. Always wear your seat belt.

VD76477,000001C -19-16NOV11-1/1

1-3-2

020113

PN=17


Keep Riders Off Machine

Only allow the operator on the machine. Keep riders off.

Riders on machine are subject to injury such as being struck by foreign objects and being thrown off of the machine. Riders also obstruct the operator’s view resulting in the machine being operated in an unsafe manner.

Avoid Backover Accidents

Before moving machine, be sure all persons are clear of the machine travel path.

Turn around and look directly for best visibility. Use mirror to assist in checking behind the machine. Keep windows and mirror clean and in good repair.

Be certain backup warning alarm is working properly.

Use a signal person when backing if view is obstructed or when in close quarters.

Keep signal person in view at all times. Use prearranged hand signals to communicate.

Avoid Machine Tipover

Use seat belt at all times.

Do not jump if the machine tips.

You will be unlikely to jump clear and the machine may crush you.

Load and unload from trucks or trailers carefully.

Be sure truck is wide enough and secured on a firm level surface. Use loading ramps and attach them properly to truck bed.

Be careful on slopes.

Use extra care on soft, rocky or frozen ground because machine may slip sideways in these conditions.

Ensure solid footing.

Use extra care when operating on stockpile materials, or near banks or excavations that may cave-in and cause machine to tip or fall.

TX03768,0000BAF -19-27MAR09-1/1

TX03768,0000B8B -19-20DEC06-1/1

1-3-3

TX03768,0000BA3 -19-07SEP06-1/1

020113

PN=18


Add and Operate Attachments Safely

Always verify compatibility of attachments by contacting your authorized dealer. Adding unapproved attachments may affect machine stability or reliability and may create a hazard for others near the machine.

Ensure that a qualified person is involved in attachment installation. Add guards to machine if operator protection is required or recommended. Verify that all connections are secure and attachment responds properly to controls.

Carefully read attachment manual and follow all instructions and warnings. In an area free of bystanders and obstructions, carefully operate attachment to learn its characteristics and range of motion.

TX03679,00016F0 -19-12FEB07-1/1

Use Special Care When Operating

Never use the loader to lift people.

Do not allow anyone to ride in the bucket or use the bucket as a work platform.

Operate carefully with raised loads.

Raising the load reduces machine stability, especially on side slopes on soft terrain. Drive and turn slowly with a raised load.

Ensure that objects in the bucket are secure.

Do not attempt to lift or carry objects that are too big or too long to fit inside the bucket unless secured with an adequate chain or other device. Keep bystanders away from raised loads.

Be careful when lifting objects.

Never attempt to lift objects too heavy for your machine. Assure machine stability and hydraulic capability with a test lift before attempting other maneuvers. Use an adequate chain or sling and proper rigging techniques to attach and stabilize loads.

Never lift an object above or near another person.

TX03768,0000B70 -19-27MAR09-1/1

Operating or Traveling On Public Roads

Machines that work near vehicle traffic or travel slower than normal highway speeds must have proper lighting and markings to assure they are visible to other drivers.

Install additional lights, beacons, slow moving vehicle

(SMV) emblems, or other devices and use as required to make the machine visible and identify it as a work machine.

Check state and local regulations to assure compliance.

Keep these devices clean and in working condition.

TX03679,00017C8 -19-02MAR07-1/1

1-3-4

020113

PN=19


Inspect and Maintain ROPS

A damaged roll-over protective structure (ROPS) should be replaced, not reused.

The protection offered by ROPS will be impaired if ROPS is subjected to structural damage, is involved in an overturn incident, or is in any way altered by welding, bending, drilling, or cutting.

If ROPS was loosened or removed for any reason, inspect it carefully before operating the machine again.

To maintain the ROPS:

•

Replace missing hardware using correct grade hardware.

•

Check hardware torque.

•

Check isolation mounts for damage, looseness or wear; replace them if necessary.

•

Check ROPS for cracks or physical damage.

TX03679,000179F -19-07SEP06-1/1

1-3-5

020113

PN=20

Safety—Maintenance Precautions

Park and Prepare for Service Safely

Warn others of service work.

Always park and prepare your machine for service or repair properly.

•

Park machine on a level surface and lower equipment to the ground.

•

Engage park brake.

•

Stop engine and remove key.

•

Attach a “Do Not Operate” tag in an obvious place in the operator's station.

Securely support machine or attachment before working under it.

•

Do not support machine with any hydraulically actuated tools or attachments.

•

Do not support machine with cinder blocks or wooden pieces that may crumble or crush.

•

Do not support machine with a single jack or other devices that may slip out of place.

•

Always install boom lock before working on or around this machine with the loader boom raised.

Understand service procedures before beginning repairs.

Keep service area clean and dry. Use two people whenever the engine must be running for service work.

Service Cooling System Safely

Explosive release of fluids from pressurized cooling system can cause serious burns.

Do not service radiator through the radiator cap. Only fill through the surge tank filler cap. Shut off engine. Only remove surge tank filler cap when cool enough to touch with bare hands. Slowly loosen cap to relieve pressure before removing completely.

TX03679,0001809 -19-02MAR07-1/1

VD76477,0001157 -19-20DEC06-1/1

1-4-1

020113

PN=21

Safety—Maintenance Precautions

Remove Paint Before Welding or Heating

Avoid potentially toxic fumes and dust.

Hazardous fumes can be generated when paint is heated by welding, soldering, or using a torch.

Remove paint before heating:

•

Remove paint a minimum of 100 mm (4 in.) from area to be affected by heating. If paint cannot be removed, wear an approved respirator before heating or welding.

•

If you sand or grind paint, avoid breathing the dust.

Wear an approved respirator.

•

If you use solvent or paint stripper, remove stripper with soap and water before welding. Remove solvent or paint stripper containers and other flammable material from area. Allow fumes to disperse at least 15 minutes before welding or heating.

Do not use a chlorinated solvent in areas where welding will take place.

Do all work in an area that is well ventilated to carry toxic fumes and dust away.

Dispose of paint and solvent properly.

DX,PAINT -19-24JUL02-1/1

Make Welding Repairs Safely

IMPORTANT: Disable electrical power before welding. Turn off main battery switch or disconnect positive battery cable.

Separate harness connectors to engine and vehicle microprocessors.

Avoid welding or heating near pressurized fluid lines.

Flammable spray may result and cause severe burns if pressurized lines fail as a result of heating. Do not let heat go beyond work area to nearby pressurized lines.

Remove paint properly. Do not inhale paint dust or fumes.

Use a qualified welding technician for structural repairs.

Make sure there is good ventilation. Wear eye protection and protective equipment when welding.

TX03679,00016D5 -19-24SEP07-1/1

Drive Metal Pins Safely

Always wear protective goggles or safety glasses and other protective equipment before striking hardened parts. Hammering hardened metal parts such as pins and bucket teeth may dislodge chips at high velocity.

Use a soft hammer or a brass bar between hammer and object to prevent chipping.

TX03679,0001745 -19-07SEP06-1/1

1-4-2

020113

PN=22

Safety—Maintenance Precautions

Service Tires Safely

Explosive separation of a tire and rim parts can cause serious injury or death.

Do not attempt to mount a tire unless you have the proper equipment and experience to perform the job.

Always maintain the correct tire pressure. Do not inflate the tires above the recommended pressure. Never weld or heat a wheel and tire assembly. The heat can cause an increase in air pressure resulting in a tire explosion.

Welding can structurally weaken or deform the wheel.

When inflating tires, use a clip-on chuck and extension hose long enough to allow you to stand to one side and

NOT in front of or over the tire assembly. Use a safety cage if available.

Check wheels for low pressure, cuts, bubbles, damaged rims or missing lug bolts and nuts.

DX,RIM -19-24AUG90-1/1

1-4-3

020113

PN=23

Safety Signs

Safety—Safety Signs


1-5-1

VD76477,0001540 -19-06JUN07-1/2

020113

PN=24

Safety—Safety Signs

1-5-2

VD76477,0001540 -19-06JUN07-2/2

020113

PN=25


Safety Signs—Backhoe Coupler (If Equipped)

Safety Signs—If Equipped with Backhoe Coupler

1-5-3

VD76477,000152B -19-26JUN07-1/1

020113

PN=26


Replace Safety Signs

Replace missing or damaged safety signs. Use this operator’s manual for correct safety sign placement.

There can be additional safety information contained on parts and components sourced from suppliers that is not reproduced in this operator's manual.

DX,SIGNS -19-18AUG09-1/1

1-5-4

020113

PN=27

Operation—Operator’s Station

Pedals and Levers

1— Backhoe Control Lever

2— Boom Lock Lever

3— Backhoe Auxiliary

Hydraulic Function Foot

Pedal

Pedals and Levers—If Equipped With Pilot

Controls

1— Backhoe Pilot Controls

2— Boom Lock Lever

3— Backhoe Auxiliary

Hydraulic Function Foot

Pedal

Fire Extinguisher Location

NOTE: Be familiar with the operation of the fire extinguisher. Inspect the fire extinguisher and service the fire extinguisher regularly

The designated location for mounting the fire extinguisher is inside the cab and to the right of the steering console.

1— Fire Extinguisher

HG31779,00001C3 -19-31OCT06-1/1

HG31779,00001C4 -19-31OCT06-1/1

2-1-1

Fire Extinguisher Location

MB60223,0000057 -19-22APR09-1/1

020113

PN=28

Standard Display Monitor (SDM)

Operation—Operator’s Station

2 3 4

1

17

16

15

5

6

7

8

14 13 12

11 10 9

TX1002567

1— STOP Indicator

2— Engine Coolant Temperature

Gauge

3— Converter Oil Temperature

Gauge

4— Fuel Level Gauge

5— Display Window

6— Park Brake Indicator

7— Hydraulic Oil Filter Restriction

Indicator

8— Diagnostic Code Indicator

9— Joystick Enable Indicator

10— Hydraulic Oil Temperature

Indicator

11— Not Used This Application

12— Fasten Seat Belt Indicator


14— MFWD Indicator

15— Engine Alternator Voltage

Indicator

•

MENU provides initial entry into machine settings, diagnostics and monitor functions. Once a main menu has been selected, pressing MENU again will return to the Normal Display Mode Menu.

•

BACK will back out of a menu, one item each time the key is pressed. The BACK key will eventually return to the normal display.

16— Engine Air Filter Restriction

Indicator

17— Engine Oil Pressure

Indicator

•

NEXT will move to the next selection within a menu or mode. Press NEXT to cycle through all the possible selections in a menu.

•

SELECT toggles between displays during normal operation. During menu modes, SELECT will activate the currently chosen menu, provide additional information on codes, make selection and reset timers.

VD76477,00011A9 -19-07MAR07-1/1

2-1-2

020113

PN=29


Standard Display Functions

1—Stop Indicator:

IMPORTANT: If STOP indicator lights and alarm sounds for more than 10 seconds with engine oil pressure indicator lit, stop machine immediately and investigate cause of problem.

If STOP indicator lights and alarm sounds for more than 10 seconds with engine coolant temperature gauge needle in red zone, reduce load and run engine for 1—2 minutes at slow idle to allow time to cool. If STOP indicator remains lit and engine coolant temperature gauge needle does not fall to an acceptable operating temperature, stop engine and investigate problem. Do not restart engine until problem has been corrected.

The STOP indicator lights and alarm sounds when:

•

Engine oil pressure is low.

•

Engine coolant temperature is excessively high.

•

Transmission control lever (TCL) is shifted into “forward”

F or “reverse” R with park brake ON.

•

TCL is shifted into “forward” F or “reverse” R with park brake OFF and seat rotated toward the backhoe position.

2—Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge:

When engine coolant temperature is too high the gauge needle will enter red zone, STOP indicator will light, and alarm will sound. Do not stop engine. Reduce load and run engine at slow idle for 1—2 minutes. If gauge needle does not fall to an acceptable operating level, stop engine. See your authorized dealer.

3—Torque Converter Oil Temperature Gauge:

When torque converter oil temperature is too high, gauge needle will enter red zone, STOP indicator will light, and alarm will sound. Reduce load immediately, shift into NEUTRAL and run engine at slow idle. Inspect for plugged oil cooler.

4—Fuel Level Gauge:

Gauge shows fuel level in tank.

Fuel level gauge needle will enter red zone when fuel level is low.

5—Display Window:

Display window has six active displays; two constant and four selectable.

•

FNR (Constant)

•

Tachometer (Constant)

•

Hour Meter (Selectable)

•

Hydraulic Oil Temperature (Selectable)

•

Battery Voltage (Selectable)

•

Job Timer (Selectable)

Press NEXT to scroll through listing, to view desired data.

6—Park Brake Indicator:

Indicator will light when park brake is engaged.

7—Hydraulic Oil Filter Restriction Indicator:

IMPORTANT: If hydraulic oil filter restriction indicator lights and hydraulic oil is warm, change filter as soon as possible to prevent damage.

NOTE: On the 310SJ model, the hydraulic oil filter restriction warning is disabled (will NOT activate) for temperatures 38° C (100° F) and below.

Indicator will light when hydraulic oil filter element is restricted.

NOTE: Cold oil can cause indicator to light temporarily.

Allow time for oil to warm up and indicator to go out before servicing filter.

8—Diagnostic Code Indicator:

Indicator will light when a

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) is activated; text message and code appears in display window. It may not be necessary to stop the engine immediately, but the cause should be investigated as soon as possible. Press MENU,

BACK, NEXT or SELECT to acknowledge message and turn indicator off.

9—Joystick Enabled Indicator:

Joystick Enable

Indicator will light when joysticks are enabled. Light will go OFF whenever joysticks become disabled.

10—Hydraulic Oil Temperature Indicator:

Indicator will light when hydraulic oil temperature is high. Reduce load immediately. Actuate backhoe bucket unload function.

11—Not used this application.

12—Fasten Seat Belt Indicator:

Indicator will light for the first 5 seconds after the engine is started to warn the operator to fasten seat belt.

13—Not used this application.

14—MFWD Indicator:

Indicator will light when mechanical front wheel drive (MFWD) is engaged.

15—Engine Alternator Voltage Indicator:

Indicator will light when alternator output voltage drops below 12V.

Check electrical system or recharge battery, if necessary.

16—Engine Air Filter Restriction Indicator:

When air filter elements are restricted, indicator will light. Clean or change filter elements.

17—Engine Oil Pressure Indicator:

IMPORTANT: Prevent possible engine damage. If engine oil pressure indicator light comes on while operating, stop machine. STOP

ENGINE IMMEDIATELY.

When engine oil pressure is low, indicator will light, STOP indicator will flash and alarm will sound. Stop machine.

STOP ENGINE IMMEDIATELY.

VD76477,00011AA -19-14JUL09-1/1

2-1-3

020113

PN=30


Anti-Theft Security System Configuration

IMPORTANT: The default Owner security code for the anti-theft security system is 111 for 3-digit security systems, and 00111 for 5-digit security systems. The default Operator security codes are 000, 999, and 998 for 3-digit security systems, and 00000, 00999, and 00998 for

5-digit security systems.

When providing Operator security codes to machine users, owners should not provide operators with the default codes. Instead, owners should first change the default Operator security codes to other values before providing codes to machine users. Refer to Changing an Operator or Owner Security Code in this section for more information.

8. Press the SELECT button to select the displayed locking method.

9. The selected locking method displays for 2 seconds before the SDM returns to the normal display mode menu.

Changing an Operator or Owner Security Code

IMPORTANT: If all three available Operator security codes will not be used, make sure the unused codes are changed to something other then their default values. Leaving access to the machine by means of default codes is not recommended.

Once the anti-theft security system has been enabled, either as a factory installed option or field installation, the system needs to be configured. Select the locking method and change the Owner and Operator security codes, as necessary.

Selecting the Locking Method

Complete the following procedure to select the locking method for the anti-theft security system. Only someone with the Owner security code can configure the locking method. There are four locking options available within the anti-theft security system:

•

Prompt for Lock

•

Auto Lock—5 Minutes

•


•

Anti-theft off (machine is not locked)

1. Press the MENU button on the standard display monitor (SDM) to access the MAIN MENU.

2. Press the NEXT button until MAIN MENU ANTITHEFT displays.

3. Press the SELECT button to display ANTITHEFT SET

CODES.

4. Press the NEXT button to display ANTITHEFT

CONFIG.

5. Press the SELECT button to display OWNER CODE

0 0 0 (3-digit system) or OWNER CODE 0 0 0 0 0

(5-digit system).

6. Enter the current Owner security code. The current locking method displays.

7. Press the NEXT button to display the appropriate locking method.

•

ANTITHEFT OFF

•

PROMPT FOR LOCK

•

AUTOLOCK 5 MINUTES

•

AUTOLOCK 60 MINUTES

The following rules apply when changing security codes:

•

An Operator security code can only be changed if that security code or the Owner security code is used during the change procedure.

•

The Owner security code can be used to reset all codes back to their defaults by accessing the RESET ALL menu option.

•

The anti-theft security system resets all Operator security codes and the Owner security code to the default values when the Master security code is used to enable the system.

•

The Owner security code can only be changed by someone using the Owner security code. The Owner security code must be entered before changing that code.




CODES.

4. Press the SELECT button. Display shows ANTITHEFT

OWNER.

5. If changing an Operator security code, press the NEXT button to display the appropriate Operator security code to change. If changing the Owner security code, proceed to next step.

6. Press the SELECT button. Display shows CURRENT

CODE 0 0 0 (3-digit system) or CURRENT CODE 0

0 0 0 0 (5-digit system).

7. Enter the Owner security code or current Operator security code for the code to be changed.

a. Press the NEXT button or the BACK button to change the number displayed in the active (flashing) field. The NEXT button increments the current digit; the BACK button decrements the current digit.


2-1-4

MD04263,00003A7 -19-22APR09-1/2

020113

PN=31


b. Press the SELECT button to accept the number displayed (flashing) in the active field and shift the active field to the next digit to the right.

NOTE: Pressing the SELECT button to accept the last digit (third digit or fifth digit depending on system configuration) processes the entered security code. If the code is incorrect, an error message appears on the monitor display.

The anti-theft security system allows three attempts to enter a valid security code before requiring the key switch to be turned OFF and

ON to restart the process.

“111”, “000”, “999”, and “998”, respectively, for 3-digit security systems, and “00111”, “00000”, “00999”, and

“00998” for 5-digit security systems.

9. The default codes display before the SDM returns to the normal display mode menu.

NOTE: If owner code is not available, security codes can be reset using the Master security code.

See your authorized dealer.

8. Enter the new security code.

9. The new security code displays for 3 seconds before the SDM returns to the normal display mode menu.

Resetting Operator and Owner Security Codes




CODES.

4. Press the SELECT button. Display shows ANTITHEFT

OWNER.

5. Press the NEXT button until ANTITHEFT RESET ALL displays.

6. Press the SELECT button. Display shows OWNER

CODE 0 0 0 (3-digit system) or OWNER CODE 0 0 0

0 0 (5-digit system).

7. Enter the current Owner security code.






Changing System Security Code Length

Use this procedure to select the length of security code to use with the anti-theft security system, either 3-digit or

5-digit. The system default is 3-digit.




CODES.

4. Press the NEXT button until ANTITHEFT SYSTEM displays.

5. Press the SELECT button. Display shows OWNER

CODE 0 0 0 (3-digit system) or OWNER CODE 0 0 0


6. Enter the current Owner security code.






7. The current Antitheft System will be displayed, either

ANTITHEFT 3-DIGIT or ANTITHEFT 5-DIGIT. To change the selection, press the NEXT button to cycle between the different systems and then press the

SELECT button to activate. At this point, all codes will be set to anti-theft system defaults, but the system locking method will remain unchanged.

8. The anti-theft security system resets the Owner and three Operator security codes to their defaults of

MD04263,00003A7 -19-22APR09-2/2

2-1-5

020113

PN=32


Anti-Theft Security System Operation

IMPORTANT: When providing Operator security codes to machine users, owners should not provide operators with the default codes. Instead, owners should first change the default Operator security codes to other values before providing codes to machine users. See Anti-Theft Security

System Configuration in this section.

NOTE: On a locked machine, engine can be started but will shut down after 3 seconds.

Locking the Machine (Operator and Owner)

There are three different locking methods available with the anti-theft security system. See Anti-Theft Security

System Configuration for more information on selecting a locking method.

•

Prompt for Lock

•


•


NOTE: On a locked machine, engine can be started but will shut down after 3 seconds.

Prompt for Lock

1. Turn key switch to OFF.

2. The monitor display shows HIT SELECT TO LOCK.

NOTE: If you do not press SELECT to lock the machine within 20 seconds of turning key switch OFF, the

SDM will NOT lock the machine.

3. Press the SELECT button within 20 seconds to lock the machine.

Auto Lock—5 Minutes


2. Machine remains unlocked for the next 5 minutes.

After 5 minutes, a valid 3-digit or 5-digit security code, depending on system configuration, is required for machine operation.

Auto Lock—60 Minutes


2. Machine remains unlocked for the next 60 minutes.

After 60 minutes, a valid 3-digit or 5-digit security code, depending on system configuration, is required for machine operation.

Unlocking the Machine (Operator and Owner)

1. Sit in the operator's seat to power up the engagement and monitor unit.

2. Turn key switch to ON position.

3. The standard display monitor (SDM) displays ENTER

CODE 0 0 0 (3-digit system) or ENTER CODE 0 0 0


4. Enter the appropriate security code: a. Press the NEXT button or the BACK button to change the number displayed in the active (flashing) field. The NEXT button increments the current digit; the BACK button decrements the current digit.


NOTE: Pressing the SELECT button to accept the last digit (third digit or fifth digit depending on system configuration) processes the entered security code.

5. Once a security code is entered, the monitor displays

UNLOCKING ANTITHEFT while the SDM attempts to unlock the machine.

6. The SDM display shows ANTITHEFT UNLOCKED if the security code was correct and the machine is unlocked.

The display shows FAILED TO UNLOCK if the security code was incorrect.

NOTE: The anti-theft security system allows three attempts to enter a valid security code before requiring the key switch to be turned OFF and


MD04263,00003A8 -19-22APR09-1/1

2-1-6

020113

PN=33


Standard Display Monitor (SDM)—Normal Display

When key switch is turned to the ON/RUN position:

•

Indicator Lights:

All indicator lights come on for 5 seconds. If the engine is cold, the oil pressure indicator and STOP indicator will remain lit, after the others go out. Park brake indicator will also stay on.

•

Gauges:

Backlights come on and gauge needles cycle, before settling to actual readings.

•

Monitor Display Window:

All LCD segments light, followed by the machine model number and then the last screen displayed at engine shut down.

Display window has six active displays, two constant and four selectable.

Transmission indicator(s) and the tachometer are constant displays.

NOTE: Transmission indicator shows the actual gear the transmission is in, not the position of the transmission control lever (TCL).

Transmission indicator shows the travel position of the transmission control lever (TCL), F—forward, N—neutral,

R—reverse and the speed range (1, 2, 3, or 4) selected by the operator.

When a transmission fault code is present and the TCL has been placed in gear, the Standard Display Monitor

(SDM) will show ?F for any forward gear, ?R for any reverse gear, or ?N when in neutral. This will allow the operator to move the machine for diagnostics or repair.

Tachometer shows engine speed in revolutions-per-minute

(rpm).

Press NEXT button repeatedly, to scroll through the selectable displays.

Hour meter, Battery Voltage, Hydraulic Oil Temperature, and Job Timer are operator selectable displays.

Hour Meter shows total machine hours, to the nearest tenth of an hour, and accumulates time only when the engine is running.

Hydraulic Oil Temperature is displayed in either degrees

Fahrenheit or Celsius depending on the units selected.

For further information, see Standard Display Monitor

(SDM)—Main Menu—Monitor in this section.

Battery Voltage is displayed to the nearest tenth of a volt.

Job Timer can be set to record time for a specific job or operator. For further information, see Standard Display

Monitor (SDM)—Main Menu—Job Timer in this section.

MD04263,00000BD -19-14JUL09-1/1

2-1-7

020113

PN=34


Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Monitor

Messages

displays on the SDM until the fault either is resolved or the operator presses any button on the SDM.

The standard display monitor (SDM) automatically displays a message for certain diagnostic trouble codes

(DTCs). When the DTC is initially active, a message

Monitor Text

CONVERTER OIL TEMP

CONVERTER OIL TEMP

CONVERTER OIL TEMP

DIFF LOCK SW FAULT

ECU CONFIG MISMATCH

ENG TEMP SENSOR FLT

ENG TEMP SENSOR FLT

ENGINE AIR FILTER

ENGINE OVER TEMP

FUEL TEMP CONTROL

HI SYSTEM VOLTAGE

HYD OIL FILTER

HYD OIL TEMP XXX (temperature value)

HYD OIL TEMP XXX (temperature value)

LOW ENGINE OIL PRES

LOW SYSTEM VOLTAGE

NO CLUTCH DISCONNECT



TURN SEAT TO REAR

The DTCs that automatically generate a SDM message include:

Description

Torque Converter Oil Temperature High

Torque Converter Oil Temperature Sensor (B6) Input Voltage High

Torque Converter Oil Temperature Sensor (B6) Input Voltage Low

Differential Lock Switch Stuck

Security Violation

Engine Coolant Temperature Input Voltage High

Engine Coolant Temperature Input Voltage Low

Engine Air Filter Restricted

Engine Coolant Temperature Extremely High

Internal ECU Failure

System Voltage High

Hydraulic Oil Filter Restricted

Hydraulic Oil Temperature High

Hydraulic Oil Temperature Moderately High

Engine Oil Pressure Extremely Low

System Voltage Low

Clutch Disconnect Device Fault

Clutch Disconnect Switch Stuck Closed

Switch Short to Ground

Seat Position Front Switch (S17) Short Circuit to Power or Stuck Closed

VD76477,0001544 -19-01FEB08-1/1

Standard Display Monitor (SDM) Main Menu

The Main Menu provides the capability to select the next submenus. The Main Menu is accessed by pressing the

MENU button. The submenus under Main Menu include:

1.

Codes:

View active or stored diagnostic trouble codes

(DTC).

2.

Monitor:

Change display units and language.

3.

Job Timer:

Set-up or reset job timer.

4.

Settings:

Operator selectable preferences.

M A I N M E N U

C O D E S

M O N I T O R

J O B T I M E R

JH91824,00009AE -19-10FEB10-1/1

2-1-8

020113

PN=35


Standard Display Monitor (SDM) Main

Menu—Codes

Press the MENU button to display the Main Menu.

Codes will be highlighted. Press the SELECT button to display the Codes submenu.

The submenus under Codes include:

•

Active

•

Stored

Press NEXT to toggle between ACTIVE and STORED

Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC).

Press SELECT to view details of either code type.

C O D E S

A C T I V E

S T O R E D

VD76477,00011EB -19-21DEC06-1/3

If no codes have been received (ACTIVE) or recorded

(STORED), NO ACTIVE or NO STORED CODES will appear on display. If codes have been received or recorded, the most recent code will appear first, numbered

1/X, along with the controller ID and the DTC.

In the example shown, 1 of 2 codes is displayed. The code was reported by the Engine Control Unit (ECU) and it is number 105.15.

TX1003365 —UN—03FEB06

DTC Example

VD76477,00011EB -19-21DEC06-2/3

Press NEXT to scroll through codes or press SELECT to view code details; a text message will give a brief description of what occurred to trigger the code. Stored codes also include hour meter readings of the first and last occurrence of the DTC.

NOTE: The DTC is stored every time the engine is started with an active code. Total number of occurrences may reflect the number of times the engine was restarted, rather than the number of times the DTC actually occurred. Stored codes should only be cleared by a trained service technician. See your authorized dealer.

F U E L G A U G E

S E N S O R

O U T O F

R A N G E H I G H

Text Message

TX1003369 —UN—03FEB06

2-1-9

Hour Meter Readings

VD76477,00011EB -19-21DEC06-3/3

020113

PN=36



Menu—Monitor


Use the NEXT button to highlight the Monitor option and press SELECT to view the Monitor submenu.

The submenus under Monitor include:

•

Units

•

Language

Press SELECT to view display options.

•

UNITS:

Press NEXT to toggle between ENGLISH and

METRIC. Press SELECT to display readings in either

English or Metric units.

•

LANGUAGE:

Press NEXT to scroll through available languages (English, Spanish or French). Press

SELECT to change display text to desired language.

SELECTED will appear when settings are changed, then display returns to MONITOR menu.

M O N I T O R

U N I T S

L A N G U A G E

E N G L I S H

M E T R I C

S E L E C T E D

Units

E N G L I S H

S P A N I S H

F R E N C H

S E L E C T E D

Languages

VD76477,00011EC -19-31OCT06-1/1

2-1-10

020113

PN=37



Menu—Job Timer

Job timer is a resettable hour meter that can be used to time specific tasks to the nearest tenth of an hour. Job timer accumulates hours whenever the engine is running, even if the display is hidden. Accumulated hours are stored in memory when the key switch is turned off.


Use the NEXT button to highlight the Job Timer option and press SELECT to view the Job Timer submenu.

The submenus under Job Timer include:

•

Hide or Unhide

•

Reset Timer

Press NEXT to toggle between HIDE or UNHIDE and

RESET TIME.

Press SELECT to hide or show job timer. HIDDEN or

UNHIDDEN will appear on display and then return to the

JOB TIMER menu.

J O B T I M E R

U N H I D E

R E S E T T I M E

Press SELECT to reset timer to zero hours. RESET will appear when hours are cleared and then display returns to the JOB TIMER menu.

VD76477,00011ED -19-14DEC06-1/1

Standard Display Monitor (SDM) Main Menu—Settings

Settings is the menu option that allows the operator to select his/her preferences.

“SAVING SELECTION” will appear once a preference has been selected.


Use the NEXT button to highlight the Settings option and press SELECT to view the Settings submenu.

The submenus under Settings include:

•

Backhoe Accu-swing™

- Off

- Fast Stop

- Medium Stop

- Slow Stop

•

Setting Antispill

NOTE: Changing selections in this menu will be confirmed with an audible alarm

- Boom and Bucket - Locks in settings

Accu-swing is a trademark of Deere & Company

- Antispill Factory - Restores factory settings

•

Stabilizer Speeds

- Slow

- Medium

- Fast

•

Selective Flow (if equipped)

- Flow Rate - 5-35 gallons per minute.

- Flow Relief Pressure

- OFF

- 1200-3500 psi

- Fast

•

Loader Auxiliary Speed (if equipped)

- Slow

- Medium

- Fast

•

Backhoe Auxiliary Speed (if equipped)

- Slow

- Medium

- Fast

•

Differential Lock Speed Limit

- Off

- On

JH91824,00009A8 -19-14MAY10-1/1

2-1-11

020113

PN=38

Right-Side Console Functions


1— Park Brake Switch

2— Key Switch

3— Horn Button

4— Ride Control Switch and

Indicator—If Equipped

5— Beacon Switch—If Equipped

6— Pattern Select Switch and


7— Not Used

8— Auxiliary Hydraulic Function

Switch and Indicator—If

Equipped

9— Not Used

10— Engine Speed Control Knob

11— Start Aid Switch—If

Equipped

12— Side Docking Lights Switch

13— Rear Work Lights Switch

14— Mechanical Front Wheel

Drive (MFWD) Switch—If

Equipped

15— Air Suspension Seat Height

Adjustment Switch—If

Equipped

16— Rear Wiper Switch—If

Equipped

17— Display Monitor

18— Blower Speed Knob—If

Equipped

19— Temperature Control

Knob—If Equipped

20— Defroster, Heater, and Air

Conditioner Switch—If

Equipped

1—Park Brake Switch:

Push left half of switch to engage park brake. Push right half of switch to disengage park brake.

2—Key Switch:

This switch has three positions:

•

Position where ignition key can be inserted or removed is the “off” position. No circuits are active in this position.

•

Turn key clockwise from the “off position. This is the

“run” position for the engine.

•

Turn key clockwise from the “run” position. This is the

“start” position for the engine. After starting engine, release key. Key will return to “run” position.

3—Horn Button:

Press button to sound the horn.

4—Ride Control Switch and Indicator—If Equipped:

Push upper half of switch to activate ride control. Switch will light when ride control is activated. Push lower half of switch to deactivate ride control.

5—Beacon Switch—If Equipped:

Push the upper half of switch to turn beacon light on. Push lower half of switch to turn beacon light off.

6—Pattern Select Switch and Indicator—If Equipped:

Push the upper half of switch to activate the excavator control pattern. Push the lower half of switch to activate the backhoe control pattern.

7—Not Used

8—Auxiliary Hydraulic Function Switch and

Indicator—If Equipped:

Push switch to activate and deactivate backhoe auxiliary hydraulic attachments. The switch has three positions:

•

Push upper half to activate auxiliary hydraulic function

•

Push to middle position to transfer control to the backhoe auxiliary function foot switch

•

Push lower half to deactivate the auxiliary hydraulic function

9—Not Used

10—Engine Speed Control Knob:

Rotate knob clockwise to increase engine speed. Rotate counterclockwise to decrease engine speed.


2-1-12

TX18203,00004B6 -19-15MAY09-1/2

020113

PN=39


11—Start Aid Button—If Equipped:

Press and hold button when engine is cold and cranking to inject starting fluid into engine during cold weather start-up.

12—Side Docking Lights Switch:

Push the upper half of switch to turn side docking lights on. Push lower half of switch to turn lights off.

13—Rear Working Lights Switch:

Push switch to middle position to turn first set of rear work lights on. Push top half of switch to turn entire set of rear work lights on. Push bottom half of switch to turn rear work lights off.

14—Mechanical Front Wheel Drive (MFWD) Switch—If

Equipped:

Push switch up to engage the MFWD axle.

Push switch down to disengage the MFWD axle.

15—Air Suspension Seat Height Adjustment

Switch—If Equipped:

18—Blower Speed Knob—If Equipped:

Turn knob clockwise to increase blower speed or counterclockwise to reduce blower speed. The blower knob has four speed settings plus an “Off” position.

19—Temperature Control Knob—If Equipped:

Turn knob to adjust air temperature. Turn clockwise towards

HOT (red) for warmer air (best for heating and defrosting).

Turn counterclockwise towards COLD (blue) for cooler air

(best for venting and air conditioning).

20—Defroster, Heater, and Air Conditioner

Controls—If Equipped:

NOTE: Blower speed knob; defroster, heater, and air conditioner switch; and temperature control knob must be adjusted as a group to obtain proper operation of the defroster, heater, or air conditioner.

CAUTION: Ensure seat is locked in position before operating machine. A seat that is loose or not properly locked can cause loss of control of machine and injuries or death.

Push upper half of switch to increase air suspension seat height and firmness of ride. Push lower half of switch to decrease air suspension seat height and firmness of ride.

16—Rear Wiper Switch—If Equipped:

IMPORTANT: To avoid damage to wiper blades,

DO NOT operate wipers if blades are frozen to windshield.

The defroster, heater, and air conditioner switch has three positions:

•

Push the rocker switch fully to the left to activate the air conditioner.

•

Push the rocker switch fully to the right to activate the defrost mode. In this position, the air conditioner compressor is powered and a vent is opened to provide air flow to the front windshield.

•

For maximum heater performance, set the rocker switch to the middle position. In this position, the air conditioner compressor is not powered.

NOTE: Use the air conditioner with the temperature control knob in a middle-to-cool position to dehumidify air without over cooling.

Push upper half of switch to turn rear windshield wiper on.

Push lower half of switch to turn rear windshield wiper off.

17—Display Monitor:

Monitor has six active displays, two constant and four selectable. See Standard Display

Monitor (SDM) in this section.

TX18203,00004B6 -19-15MAY09-2/2

2-1-13

020113

PN=40


Controls—Steering Console

1 2

3

4 5

6 9

TX1054141

1— Work Lights Switch

2— Warning Lights Switch

3— Loader Coupler Switch—If

Equipped

4— Loader Coupler Pin


5— Front Windshield Washer

Switch—If Equipped

6— Front Windshield Wiper

Switch—If Equipped

7— Turn Signal Switch

8— Transmission Control Lever

(TCL)

9— Water In Fuel (WIF)


1—Work Lights Switch:

Push switch to operate tail lights and front work lights, if equipped. The switch has three positions:

•

Push upper half to first position to turn all front work lights and tail lights on.

•

•

Push to middle position to turn tail lights and 2 of 4 front work lights, if equipped, on.

Push lower half to turn tail lights and front work lights, if equipped, off.

3—Loader Coupler Switch—If Equipped:

Push in and lift switch to the UNLOCK position to retract coupler pins.

Coupler pin indicator will illuminate and chime will sound.

Push switch down to return to the LOCK position to engage coupler pins. Indicator will turn off and chimes will stop.

4—Loader Coupler Pin Indicator—If Equipped:

Indicator will light and chimes will sound when the loader coupler switch is in UNLCOK position and the coupler pins are retracted. Indicator will turn off when quick coupler switch is in LOCK position.

2—Warning Lights Switch:

Push upper half of switch to turn amber warning lights at front and rear of cab on.

When warning lights switch is on, warning lights indicator, left turn indicator, and right turn indicator will flash. Push lower half of switch to turn amber warning lights off.

5—Front Windshield Washer Switch—If Equipped:

Push upper half of switch to turn front windshield washer on. Push lower half of switch to turn front windshield washer off.

If the warning lights switch is on when the key switch is turned to the OFF position, the warning HAZARD LAMPS

ON will display on the Standard Display Monitor (SDM).

The audible alarm will sound two times and the warning will remain displayed for 5 seconds, after which the SDM will power down.

6—Front Windshield Wiper Switch—If Equipped:

NOTE: To avoid damage to wiper blades, DO NOT operate wipers if blades are frozen to windshield.

Push switch to operate front windshield wiper. The switch has three positions:


MD04263,00000BE -19-12MAY09-1/2

2-1-14

020113

PN=41


•

Push upper half to first position to turn front windshield wiper on at FAST speed.

•

Push to middle position to turn front windshield wiper on at SLOW speed.

•

Push lower half to turn front windshield wiper off.

7—Turn Signal Switch:

Push switch to signal turning direction. The switch has three positions:

•

Push left half to signal left turn. Left turn indicator will flash.

•

Middle position is OFF. Indicators will not flash unless warning lights switch is ON.

•

Push right half to signal right turn. Right turn indicator will flash.

Amber turn signal lights flash individually to signal direction of turn when left or right half of turn signal switch is pushed. Amber turn signal lights flash together when warning lights switch (2) is pushed.

8—Transmission Control Lever (TCL):

NOTE: When TCL is in the Reverse position, only travel speeds 1 and 2 are operational.

Place TCL in middle (detented) position for neutral. Move

TCL to F (forward travel) or R (reverse travel). Rotate

TCL to select gear (travel speed) range.

9—Water In Fuel (WIF) Indicator—If Equipped:

WIF indicator light turns ON when excess water is in auxiliary water separator fuel filter.

MD04263,00000BE -19-12MAY09-2/2

Pilot Control Enable/Disable Switch—If

Equipped

CAUTION: Prevent injury from unexpected machine movement. Always lock hydraulics when not operating backhoe.

Push upper half of switch (1) to “Unlock” position to enable pilot controls. Push lower half of switch to “Lock” position to disable pilot controls.

If the seat changes operating position or the engine is shut off, the pilot controls are automatically disabled. To enable pilot controls, cycle switch to “Lock” position and back to “Unlocked” position.

VD76477,00011FB -19-01NOV06-1/1

Pattern Select Switch—If Equipped

CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from unexpected machine movement. Always verify control response before operating backhoe.

Push backhoe symbol on switch (1) to select backhoe hydraulic pattern. Push excavator symbol on switch to select excavator hydraulic pattern.

1— Pattern Select Switch

VD76477,0001126 -19-19OCT06-1/1

2-1-15

020113

PN=42


Engine Speed Control Knob

Rotate knob (1) clockwise to increase engine speed.

Rotate counterclockwise to decrease engine speed.

The engine speed control knob is operating normally when:

•

Engine speed

changes

when turning the dial while seat is in loader position*.

•

Engine speed

changes

when turning the dial while seat is in the backhoe position*.

•

Engine speed

does change

when turning the dial while seat is not in backhoe or loader position.

•

Engine speed

does not change

when turning the dial while service brake pedal is pressed in either backhoe or loader position.

•

Engine speed is dialed up to something other than idle and seat position changes cause the engine speed control knob to drop out.

*Engine speed control knob must be dialed to low speed stop position before engine speed will respond to changes in the dial position.


Horn Button

Press the horn button (1) to sound the horn.

1— Horn Button

VD76477,00014B1 -19-09JUL09-1/1

VD76477,0001125 -19-19OCT06-1/1

2-1-16

020113

PN=43


Defroster, Heater, and Air Conditioner

Controls—If Equipped

Blower speed knob (2); defroster, heater, and air conditioner switch (1); and temperature control knob (3) must be adjusted as a group to obtain proper operation of the defroster, heater, or air conditioner.

Push the defroster, heater, and air conditioner switch to the appropriate setting. The defroster, heater, and air conditioner switch has three positions:

•

Push the rocker switch fully to the left to activate the air conditioner. Adjust the blower knob and temperature control knob as appropriate.

•

Push the rocker switch fully to the right to activate the defrost mode. In this position, the air conditioner compressor is powered and a vent is opened to provide air flow to the front windshield. Adjust the blower knob and temperature control knob as appropriate.

•

For maximum heater performance, set the rocker switch to the middle position. In this position, the air conditioner compressor is not powered.

Turn blower speed knob clockwise to increase blower speed or counterclockwise to reduce blower speed. The blower knob has four speed settings and an off position.

Turn temperature control knob to adjust air temperature.

Turn clockwise towards HOT (red) for warmer air (best for heating and defrosting). Turn counterclockwise towards

COLD (blue) for cooler air (best for venting and air conditioning).

NOTE: Use the air conditioner with the temperature control knob in a middle-to-cool position to dehumidify air without over cooling.

1— Defroster, Heater, and Air

Conditioner Switch

2— Blower Speed Knob

3— Temperature Control Knob

Heater and Air Conditioner Controls—Earlier Machines

Heater and Air Conditioner Controls—Later Machines

TX18203,00004B5 -19-15MAY09-1/1

2-1-17

020113

PN=44


Side Windows—Secondary Exits

The side windows and door windows can open 180°. The door windows can be used as secondary exits.

To open, pull handle (A) in and away from cab post latch.

Retain in open position against fixed window on same side by fastening knob (B) into socket (C). Turn knob until tension is felt to prevent window from swinging during operation.

A—Handle (8 used)

B—Fastening Knob (2 used)

C—Socket (2 used)

Right Side Shown

CED,OUO1079,381 -19-14JUN00-1/1

Rear Windows

CAUTION: Prevent injury from unexpected machine movement. Always lock hydraulics when opening or closing window.

Squeeze upper rear window latches (A) and slide upper rear window up or down.

Squeeze middle rear window latches (B) and slide middle rear window up or down.

Ensure all rear window latches lock into detent positions on window frame.

A—Upper Rear Window Latch

(2 used)

B—Middle Rear Window Latch

(2 used)

2-1-18

VD76477,0001127 -19-19OCT06-1/1

020113

PN=45


Adjusting Seat


NOTE: Grease seat base guide rails as needed.

Air Suspension Seat

Lift forward and aft lever (1) up and slide seat to desired position. Release forward and aft lever to lock seat in position.

Lift pivot lever (2) up and pivot seat. Release pivot lever to lock seat in position.

Lift back tilt lever (3) up and adjust backrest to desired tilt angle. Release back tilt lever to lock backrest in position.

Turn lumbar support adjustment lever (4) to position lumbar support for operator's preference.

1— Forward and Aft Lever

2— Pivot Lever

3— Back Tilt Lever

4— Lumbar Support

Adjustment Lever

VD76477,0001276 -19-20NOV06-1/2

Mechanical Suspension Seat


NOTE: With weight adjustment knob turned counterclockwise (—) as far as it can go and with no weight on seat, the distance to the floor from top of seat is 48 cm (19 in). With knob turned clockwise (+) as far as it can go, the distance to floor from top of seat is 53 cm (21 in). The distances will decrease by 5 cm (2 in.) when an

86 kg (190 lb) person sits on seat.

Lift forward and aft lever (1) up and slide seat to desired position. Release forward and aft lever to lock seat in position.

Lift pivot lever (2) up and pivot seat. Release pivot lever to lock seat in position.

Lift back tilt lever (3) up and adjust backrest to desired tilt angle. Release back tilt lever to lock backrest in position.

Turn lumbar support adjustment lever (4) to position lumbar support for operator’s preference.

While NOT sitting on seat, turn weight adjustment knob

(5) to change seat height and ride stiffness.

1— Forward and Aft Lever

2— Pivot Lever

3— Back Tilt Lever

4— Lumbar Support

Adjustment Lever

5— Weight Adjustment Knob

VD76477,0001276 -19-20NOV06-2/2

2-1-19

020113

PN=46


Steering Wheel Tilt Lever—If Equipped

Lift lever (A) and tilt steering wheel (B) to operator's preference. Release lever to lock steering wheel in position.

For Joystick-to-wheel clearance, tilt steering wheel full-up before unlocking and pivoting seat.

A—Steering Wheel Tilt Lever B—Steering Wheel

VD76477,00010F6 -19-23OCT06-1/1

2-1-20

020113

PN=47


12-Volt Accessory Outlets

Accessory outlets (A) are positioned for operator's convenience.

A—12-Volt Accessory Outlet

Optional Cab Shown

Optional Cab Shown

VD76477,00011B2 -19-03NOV06-1/1

2-1-21

020113

PN=48

Operation—Operating The Machine

Inspect Machine Daily Before Starting

Perform periodic service checks.

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM: Check for worn or frayed wires and loose or corroded connections.

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM: Check for leaks, missing or loose clamps, kinked hoses, and lines or hoses in areas that rub against each other or other parts.

BACKHOE AND LOADER: Check for loose, bent, broken or missing parts and hardware.

LUBRICATION: Check lubrication points.

PROTECTIVE DEVICES: Check ROPS, guards, shields, covers, seat belt, and reverse warning alarm.

FIRE PREVENTION: Clean machine of debris.

PARK BRAKE: Check for correct operation.

SAFETY: Walk around machine to be sure all persons are clear from machine area.

CED,OUO1079,468 -19-01SEP10-1/1

2-2-1

020113

PN=49

Operation—Operating The Machine

Check Instruments Before Starting

2 3 4

1

17

16

15

5

6

7

8

14 13 12

Turn key switch clockwise to ON/RUN position. (Do not start engine.) The following must occur:

•

The audible alarm must sound.

•

All LCD segments in the display window (5) must light, followed by the machine model number and the last screen displayed at shutdown.

•

All gauges (2—4) must be backlit, and all gauge needles must cycle from minimum (left) to maximum

(right) in approximately 1 second.

•

All indicators must light for 5 seconds including those in the Sealed Switch Module (SSM). With the engine cold, the engine oil pressure indicator and STOP indicator will remain lit, after other indicators go out. Park brake indicator will also stay ON, as will switch indicators for previously activated functions.

NOTE: When the key is turned ON, but before starting, a diagnostic sequence is initiated. If a fault is detected, the corresponding diagnostic trouble code (DTC) will activate.

See Operation—Operator’s Station for descriptions of indicators.

If any indicator fails to light, see your authorized dealer.

11 10 9

TX1002567

1— STOP Indicator

2— Engine Coolant

Temperature Gauge

3— Converter Oil Temperature

Gauge

4— Fuel Level Gauge

5— Display Window

6— Park Brake Indicator

7— Hydraulic Oil Filter

Restriction Indicator

8— Diagnostic Code Indicator

9— Joysticks Enabled Indicator

10— Hydraulic Oil Temperature

Indicator


12— Fasten Seat Belt Indicator


14— MFWD Indicator

15— Engine Alternator Voltage

Indicator

16— Engine Air Filter

Restriction Indicator

17— Engine Oil Pressure

Indicator

18— Accessory Position—Key

Switch

19— STOP Position—Key

Switch

20— On/Run Position—Key

Switch

21— Start Position—Key

Switch

VD76477,00011AC -19-22JAN09-1/1

2-2-2

020113

PN=50


Engine Break-In Period

IMPORTANT: To avoid engine damage it is critical to observe the engine break-in period. Extra care during the first 250 hours of operation will result in more satisfactory long-term engine performance and life. DO NOT exceed 250 hours of operation with break-in oil.

1. Operate the machine at heavy or normal loads with minimal idling during the break-in period. During the first 20 hours, avoid prolonged periods of engine idling or sustained maximum load operation. If engine will idle longer than 5 minutes, stop engine.

2. Check engine oil level more frequently during the engine break-in period.

IMPORTANT: DO NOT add make-up oil until the oil level is BELOW the ADD mark on the

Break-In is a trademark of Deere & Company.

dipstick. John Deere Break-In™ Engine Oil should be used to make up any oil consumed during the break-in period.

3. Change oil and oil filter after first 250 hours (maximum).

Fill crankcase with the normal seasonal viscosity grade oil. See Maintenance—Machine. (Section 3-1.)

4. Watch coolant temperature gauge closely. If coolant temperature rises above specified limits on the gauge, reduce load on engine. Unless temperature drops quickly, stop the engine and determine the cause before resuming operation. See Troubleshooting.

(Section 4-3.)

5. Watch oil pressure gauge for pressure within specification.

6. Check serpentine belt for proper alignment and seating in pulley grooves.

VD76477,00016F2 -19-22DEC10-1/1

Starting the Engine

CAUTION: Avoid possible injury or death from a runaway machine. DO NOT start engine by shorting across starter terminals. Machine will start in gear if normal circuitry is bypassed.

NEVER start engine while standing on ground.

Start engine only from operator’s seat, with transmission control lever (TCL) in N “neutral” and park brake engaged.

NOTE: The engine will start with the TCL in gear, but the transmission will automatically be shifted to neutral and the display will show “N” as the actual gear. You will not be able to put the tractor into gear without first cycling TCL through the neutral range.

2. Sound horn.

1. Sit in seat and fasten seat belt.

VD76477,00010F7 -19-14JUL09-1/3

NOTE: Controls and switches must be in the positions described before starting engine.

3. Move TCL lever (A) to N.

A—TCL


2-2-3

VD76477,00010F7 -19-14JUL09-2/3

020113

PN=51


4. Push the left half of the park brake switch (B) to engage the park brake.

5. Push the lower half of the ride control switch (C), if equipped, to deactivate ride control.

IMPORTANT: To avoid damage to the turbocharger and other engine components, let the engine run at low idle for 30 seconds before operating machine.

6. Turn engine speed control knob (D) to 1/3 speed.

IMPORTANT: Do not operate starter motor for more than 30 seconds at a time, or it may be damaged. If engine does not start, wait at least 2 minutes before trying again.

7. Turn key switch (E) clockwise to “Start” and hold in position until engine starts. Release key switch when engine starts. If engine does not start after 30 seconds, turn key switch to “Off” and wait 2 minutes before trying again.

B—Park Brake Switch

C—Ride Control Switch—If

Equipped

D—Engine Speed Control Knob

E—Key Switch

VD76477,00010F7 -19-14JUL09-3/3

Starting Fluid—Cold Weather Start Aid—If

Equipped

CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from exploding container. Starting fluid is highly flammable.

Keep container away from heat, sparks, and open flame. Contents are pressurized. Do not puncture or incinerate container. Remove can from machine if engine does not need starting fluid.

IMPORTANT: Remove container and install plug in base to protect start aid components from dust.

IMPORTANT: Prevent damage to engine. Use starting aid when temperatures are below 0°C (32°F) and only when engine is COLD.

USING START AID

IMPORTANT: To avoid engine damage, push and hold start aid button only when engine is cold and cranking. Starting fluid is being injected into engine as long as the start aid button is held.

NOTE: Crank engine for 30 seconds maximum, allowing

2 minutes between cranking periods.

While cranking engine, push start aid button (1).

Replacing Starting Aid Container

1— Start Aid Button


MD04263,0000139 -19-20FEB09-1/2

2-2-4

020113

PN=52


1. Close engine hood. Raise front loader boom and install loader boom service lock. See Loader Boom

Service Lock. (Section 3-2.)

2. Open engine hood. See Opening and Closing Engine

Hood. (Section 3-2.)

3. Loosen clamp (2).

4. Turn start aid container (3) counterclockwise to remove.

IMPORTANT: Remove can from machine if engine does not need starting fluid. Remove can from container and install plug (4) in base to protect start aid components from dust.

5. Remove safety cap from new container.

6. Remove plug and turn container clockwise in starting aid base to install.

7. Tighten clamp.

8. Close engine hood.

2— Clamp

3— Start Aid Container

4— Plug

Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine

Tier 2/Stage II Engine

MD04263,0000139 -19-20FEB09-2/2

Using Coolant Heater—If Equipped

CAUTION: Prevent possible personal injury from an electrical shock. Use a heavy-duty, grounded cord to connect heater to electrical power.

Plug coolant heater into a 115-volt outlet 10 hours before starting the engine.

TX,25,BD2080 -19-07MAR07-1/1

Warm-Up

IMPORTANT: To ensure proper lubrication, idle engine at 1/3 speed for 5 minutes. Extend period as necessary when operating at temperatures below freezing.

•

Before moving machine, run at 1/3 speed for at least 5 minutes.

IMPORTANT: To avoid carbon build-up in engine and to use fuel in most efficient manner, do not allow machine to idle at low rpm.

•

Do not run engine at fast or slow idle.

•

Operate machine under light loads for first 5 minutes once engine is warm.

•

Check instruments regularly.

TX,25,BD2082 -19-15OCT08-1/1

2-2-5

020113

PN=53


Cold Weather Warm-Up

CAUTION: Prevent injury from moving backhoe.

Backhoe may overshoot in extreme cold conditions. Allow backhoe to warm up.

IMPORTANT: If hydraulic oil is cold, hydraulic functions move slowly. Do not attempt machine operations until hydraulic functions move at close-to-normal cycle times.

1. Run engine at 1/2 speed for 15 minutes.

IMPORTANT: To prevent damage to bucket leveling tube due to cold oil, cycle bucket three times at hood height before using under normal operation.

In extremely cold conditions, an extended warming up period will be necessary.

Avoid sudden operation of hydraulic functions until engine is thoroughly warmed up. Remove ice, snow, and mud from machine before operation.

2. Raise loader lift arms to hood height. Cycle bucket from stop to stop three times.

3. Cycle all remaining hydraulic functions to distribute warmed oil until all functions operate freely.

VD76477,0001386 -19-08JAN07-1/1

Ride Control Operation—If Equipped

CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from unexpected boom or bucket movement when equipped with ride control. Ride control accumulator energy must be discharged when working on hydraulic components. Turn ignition switch “On”. Push ride control switch “On” and move loader control lever to “Float” position.

Do not have the ride control switch “On” when starting the machine; the machine may move if the ride control switch is “On” and the machine is started.

Do not have ride control engaged when operating the loader; the ride control system may cause unexpected movement.

The ride control system has an accumulator and valve in the loader circuit.

Operating Ride Control

Push upper half of ride control switch (1) to improve machine ride and reduce tire flexing when traveling over rough terrain at a high speed with loaded bucket, or when transporting with an empty bucket. The ride control indicator (2) will remain lit while ride control is engaged.

If engine is stopped with ride control engaged, ride control switch will remain in the “On” position and ride control will be engaged when the machine is restarted. Always push lower half of ride control switch to disengage ride control before starting the machine.

NOTE: With ride control engaged, the front end of the machine will not remain raised if lifted off the ground with the front loader. The front end of the machine will drift back to the ground. To hold front end up while using the backhoe, disengage ride control.

1— Ride Control Switch 2— Ride Control Indicator

Discharging the Ride Control Circuit for Service

Discharge hydraulic pressure from the ride control system before performing maintenance. See Discharge

Ride Control System Hydraulic Pressure—If Equipped.

(Section 4-1.)

VD76477,0001129 -19-18DEC07-1/1

2-2-6

020113

PN=54


Pilot Control Operation—If Equipped

1. Rotate seat to backhoe operation position.

2. Use pilot control wrist rests (1) to pull right and left pilot control towers towards operator.

3. Push pilot control enable/disable switch (2) to “Unlock” position to enable pilot controls.

CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from unexpected machine movement. Always lock hydraulics when not operating backhoe.

4. Push pilot control enable/disable switch to “Lock” position to disable pilot controls.

NOTE: Alarm will sound and monitor will display “Hoe” and “On” when pilot controls are enabled and seat is not in backhoe position.

If pilot controls are automatically disabled, cycle switch to “Lock” position and back to “Unlock” position to enable pilot controls.

Discharge hydraulic pressure from the pilot control system before performing maintenance. See Discharge

1— Pilot Control Wrist Rests 2— Pilot Control Enable/Disable Switch

Pilot Control System Hydraulic Pressure—If Equipped.

(Section 4-1.)

HG31779,00001BB -19-15OCT08-1/1

Driving the Machine

CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from unexpected machine movement. Machine will turn in direction of brake pedal if only one brake pedal is applied. Connect brake pedals together before traveling at high speed.

1.

Engage brake pedal locking bar (A) to lock left and right brake pedals (B and C) together. Keep brake pedal locking bar engaged unless brakes are to be used to aid in turning.

CAUTION: Use a seat belt to minimize chance of injury from an accident such as an overturn.

2. Fasten seat belt.

A—Brake Pedal Locking Bar

B—Left Brake Pedal


C—Right Brake Pedal

MD04263,00000BF -19-14JUL09-1/3

2-2-7

020113

PN=55


3. Move engine speed control knob (H) to 1/3 speed and start engine.

NOTE: Park brake indicator will light, alarm will sound, and STOP indicator will light if transmission control lever (TCL) is moved out of NEUTRAL while park brake is engaged. Disengage the park brake before moving the TCL out of neutral.

If park brake is disengaged when engine is stopped, it automatically engages. If engine is then started with right half of the park brake switch pushed, operator must push left half of park brake switch, then push right half of park brake switch to disengage park brake before driving machine.

4. Push right half of park brake switch (F) to disengage the park brake.

CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from unexpected machine movement. Never rely on TCL and gearshift lever to keep machine from moving. Always engage park brake to hold machine.

5. Use TCL (D) to change direction of travel.

•

Reduce speed when changing direction of travel.

•

Move TCL to F to travel forward and to R to travel in reverse.

•

Move TCL to N when machine is not moving. TCL will drop to a detented position when in neutral.

6. TCL/range lever also selects forward gear ranges 1, 2,

3, and 4 and reverse ranges 1 and 2.

•

Rotate handle on TCL (D) to select gear position.

D—Transmission Control Lever

(TCL)

E—Gear Range Pointer

F— Park Brake Switch

G—Ride Control Switch—If

Equipped

H—Engine Speed Control Knob

J— Key Switch

•

Gear position is indicated by the gear range pointer

(E).

MD04263,00000BF -19-14JUL09-2/3

7.

Vary travel speed when driving using engine speed control pedal (K).

K—Engine Speed Control

Pedal

MD04263,00000BF -19-14JUL09-3/3

2-2-8

020113

PN=56


Cruise Control

When operating the machine with the seat facing the steering wheel, cruise control can be activated by the operator. This feature is useful for road travel, or when traversing rough ground on a job site, where it is difficult to maintain a steady speed with the accelerator pedal.

To set cruise control, use the engine speed control knob

(1) to set engine speed to desired level. Engine speed will remain at that setting until brake pedals are depressed, at which time engine speed will automatically return to idle. In order to reengage cruise control, the engine speed control knob must be returned to idle position and then reset to desired speed.

If the cruise control is set to a speed lower than high idle, the accelerator pedal can be used to accelerate from the selected speed setting up to high idle. If operator then removes foot from accelerator pedal, speed will return to the prior selected setting.


Operating Stabilizers

CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from unexpected machine movement. Stabilizers must be set on a firm surface. Do not dig under stabilizers. Be alert to possible machine movement when raising stabilizers and loader bucket.

Before operating the backhoe, use stabilizers to lift and level the machine. Use the levers to move stabilizers from raised position (A and C) to lowered position (B and D).

Stabilizer feet on 310J, 310SJ are reversible for use on paved and unpaved surfaces. See Reversing Stabilizer

Feet—310J, 310SJ. (Section 4-1.)

A—Left Stabilizer Up

B—Left Stabilizer Down

C—Right Stabilizer Up

D—Right Stabilizer Down

VD76477,00014B8 -19-16MAR07-1/1

VD76477,000113B -19-24OCT06-1/1

2-2-9

020113

PN=57


Operating Boom Lock

IMPORTANT: To prevent possible machine damage, unlock boom before operating backhoe.

Disengaging the Boom Lock

1. Raise boom against stops to release tension on boom lock (A).

2. Pull boom lock control lever (B) toward operator to disengage boom lock from boom hooks (unlocked position).

3. Lower boom so boom hooks are clear of boom lock.

Release boom lock control lever.

Engaging the Boom Lock

1. Pull boom lock control lever toward operator to raise boom lock.

2. Raise boom against stops.

3. Release boom lock control lever to engage boom lock with boom hooks (locked position).

4. After machine shutdown, move boom control lever to release hydraulic pressure and put tension on boom lock.

A—Boom Lock B—Boom Lock Control Lever

Optional Two-Lever, Six-Function Configuration Shown

2-2-10

Optional Pilot Controls Shown

VD76477,00010CE -19-16OCT06-1/1

020113

PN=58


Operating Swing Lock

IMPORTANT: To prevent possible machine damage, remove swing lock pin before operating backhoe.

Disengaging the Swing Lock

Remove swing lock pin (A) from swing lock mounting hole

(B) and install pin in storage position in operator’s station.

Engaging the Swing Lock

Remove swing lock pin from storage position in operator's station and install pin in swing lock mounting hole.

A—Swing Lock Pin B—Swing Lock Mounting Hole

Operating Swing Lock Pin

IMPORTANT: To prevent possible machine damage, remove swing lock pin before operating backhoe.

VD76477,00011F0 -19-31OCT06-1/1

CED,OUO1079,418 -19-07JUL00-1/1

2-2-11

020113

PN=59


Operating Backhoe—John Deere Two-Lever Controls

CAUTION: Several control patterns are available for this backhoe. Always verify control response before operating.

Prevent possible personal injury from unexpected machine movement. DO NOT operate backhoe from outside the operator station. Only operate when in the operator's seat in backhoe operation position with stabilizers down.

IMPORTANT: To avoid machine damage, do not swing boom into stabilizers.

NOTE: When seat is turned to backhoe operation position, seat position sensor will sound an audible alarm and light the STOP indicator if transmission control lever (TCL) is moved to F or R.

A conversion kit for changing controls is available from your authorized dealer. Labels corresponding to other controls MUST be installed.

Operate backhoe with control levers. Move levers as shown to maneuver backhoe components in desired directions.

For faster cycle times, fully extend levers when moving and operate more than one component at a time.

A—Boom Lower

B—Boom Raise

C—Boom Swing Left

D—Boom Swing Right

E—Dipperstick Raise

F— Dipperstick Lower

G—Bucket Load

H—Bucket Dump

VD76477,00011A0 -19-14JUL09-1/1

2-2-12

020113

PN=60


Operating Backhoe—Excavator Two-Lever Controls

CAUTION: Several control patterns are available for this backhoe. Always verify control response before operating.

Prevent possible personal injury from unexpected machine movement. DO NOT operate backhoe from outside the operator station. Only operate when in the operator's seat in backhoe operation position with stabilizers down.

IMPORTANT: To avoid machine damage, do not swing boom into stabilizers.

NOTE: When seat is turned to backhoe operation position, seat position sensor will sound an audible alarm and light the STOP indicator if transmission control lever is moved to F or R.

A conversion kit for changing John Deere two-lever controls to excavator two-lever controls is available from your authorized dealer. Labels corresponding to the controls MUST be installed.

Operate backhoe with control levers. Move levers as shown to maneuver backhoe components in desired directions.

For faster cycle times, fully extend levers when moving and operate more than one component at a time.

A—Boom Lower

B—Boom Raise





G—Bucket Load

H—Bucket Dump

VD76477,00011A1 -19-14JUL09-1/1

2-2-13

020113

PN=61


Operating Backhoe—John Deere Pilot

Controls

CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from unexpected machine movement. Always lock hydraulics when not operating backhoe. Never place any part of body beyond window frame. It could be crushed by the boom if boom control lever is accidently bumped or otherwise engaged.

Make sure you know the location and function of each control before operating.

Never place any part of the body beyond the window frame. Replace missing or broken windows immediately.

The machine is factory equipped with the control pattern shown.

NOTE: With this control pattern, functions must correspond to the black-on-yellow labels located on the cab post.

When a lever is released, it will return to neutral. The machine will remain positioned.

A—Boom Lower

B—Boom Raise





G—Bucket Load

H—Bucket Dump

VD76477,000134A -19-20DEC06-1/1

2-2-14

020113

PN=62


Operating Backhoe—Excavator Pilot

Controls

CAUTION: Prevent injury from unexpected machine movement. Always lock hydraulics when not operating backhoe. Never place any part of body beyond window frame. It could be crushed by the boom if boom control lever is accidentally bumped or otherwise engaged.

Make sure you know the location and function of each control before operating.

Never place any part of the body beyond the window frame. Replace missing or broken windows immediately.

NOTE: With this control pattern, functions must correspond to the black-on-white labels located on the cab post.

When a lever is released, it will return to neutral. The machine will remain positioned.

A—Boom Lower

B—Boom Raise





G—Bucket Load

H—Bucket Dump

VD76477,000134B -19-20DEC06-1/1

2-2-15

020113

PN=63


Operating Extendible Dipperstick—If

Equipped

Push extendible dipperstick control pedal with toe or heel to extend (I) or retract (J) the extendible dipperstick.

I— Extendible Dipperstick

Extend

J— Extendible Dipperstick

Retract



2-2-16

CED,OUO1079,419 -19-23JAN03-1/1

020113

PN=64


Operating Extendible Dipperstick With

Attachments

When using attachments, it is recommended to retract extendible dipperstick and lock in place. Operating hydraulic hammers, compactors, etc., with dipperstick extended may cause abnormal wear and stress on dipperstick components and ultimately shorten their life.

AM40430,0000072 -19-15OCT08-1/1

Operating Extendible Dipperstick Lock—If

Equipped

CAUTION: To prevent serious injury, always install locking pin from ground.

Always lower backhoe to ground and stop engine before removing or installing extendible dipperstick locking pin.

Disengaging Extendible Dipperstick Lock

1. Remove quick-lock pin from extendible dipperstick locking pin (A).

2. Remove extendible dipperstick locking pin from locking position (C) and install extendible dipperstick locking pin in storage position (B).

3. Install quick-lock pin on extendible dipperstick locking pin.

Engaging Extendible Dipperstick Lock

1. Remove quick-lock pin from extendible dipperstick locking pin.

2. Remove extendible dipperstick locking pin from storage position and install extendible dipperstick locking pin in locking position.

3. Install quick-lock pin on extendible dipperstick locking pin.

A—Extendible Dipperstick

Locking Pin

B—Storage Position

C—Locking Position

CED,OUO1079,412 -19-07JUL00-1/1

2-2-17

020113

PN=65


Operating Backhoe Auxiliary Hydraulic Selective Flow Functions—If Equipped



A—Backhoe Auxiliary Hydraulic

Selective Flow Switch

B—Backhoe Auxiliary Hydraulic

Selective Flow Foot Switch

C—Flow Selector Knob

Backhoe Auxiliary Hydraulic Selective Flow Switches

The backhoe auxiliary hydraulic selective flow switch (A) has three positions:

•

Push upper half to activate the backhoe auxiliary hydraulic selective flow.

•

Toggle to middle position to transfer control to the backhoe auxiliary hydraulic selective flow foot switch.

•

Push lower half to deactivate the backhoe auxiliary hydraulic selective flow.

When the backhoe auxiliary hydraulic selective flow switch is in the middle position, push the backhoe auxiliary hydraulic selective flow foot switch (B) to activate and deactivate backhoe auxiliary hydraulic attachments.

Deactivate backhoe auxiliary hydraulic selective flow when no attachment is installed, when changing attachments, or when installed attachments are not in use.

Selective Flow Valve Adjustment

1. Deactivate backhoe auxiliary hydraulic selective flow by pressing lower half of backhoe auxiliary hydraulic selective flow switch (A).

IMPORTANT: To avoid potential machine damage, machine must be “OFF” when adjusting selective flow solenoid control valve.

2. To adjust flow, rotate flow selector knob (C) until the desired flow setting is observed. The six flow settings are:

•

34 L/min (9 gpm)

•

49 L/min (13 gpm)

•

60 L/min (16 gpm)

•

68 L/min (18 gpm)

•

83 L/min (22 gpm)

•

94 L/min (25 gpm)

ER93822,0000262 -19-02SEP08-1/1

2-2-18

020113

PN=66


Operating Backhoe Auxiliary Hydraulic Functions—If Equipped

Manual Controls Shown

1— Fifth-Function Pedal 2— Sixth-Function Pedal

Fifth-Function Pedal

Operate fifth-function pedal (1) to control the attachment.

See your backhoe auxiliary hydraulic attachment operator's manual for more information.

NOTE: Fifth-function pedal will operate extendible dipperstick if equipped.


Sixth-Function Pedal

Operate sixth-function pedal (2) to control the attachment.

See your backhoe auxiliary hydraulic attachment operator's manual for more information.

ER93822,0000263 -19-15OCT08-1/1

2-2-19

020113

PN=67


Operating Hydraulic Thumb—If Equipped

Manual Controls Shown

NOTE: Hydraulic thumb control pedal may change location based on if machine is equipped with extendible dipperstick. If equipped with extendible dipperstick the left auxiliary hydraulic function control pedal will operate thumb. If equipped with standard dipperstick the right auxiliary hydraulic control pedal will operate thumb.

Push appropriate auxiliary hydraulic function control pedal

(1 or 2) with heal or toe to close (3) or open (4) hydraulic thumb.

1— Left Auxiliary Hydraulic

Function Control Pedal

2— Right Auxiliary Hydraulic

Function Control Pedal (or

Extendible Dipperstick—If

Equipped)

3— Close Thumb

4— Open Thumb


Hydraulic Thumb Movement

JH91824,000029C -19-22APR09-1/1

2-2-20

020113

PN=68


Operating Backhoe Coupler—If Equipped

CAUTION:

Prevent serious injury or death from unexpected machine movement. Ensure coupler is attached properly to attachment.

1.

Locking Coupler:

Position machine and coupler to pick up desired attachment.

2. Move the adjustable coupler hook (3) by turning the hex head (5) clockwise into the fully retracted position.

3. Lower front coupler hook (4) to pin (2).

4. Rotate, curl, and lift the attachment slightly off the ground.

5. Lower adjustable coupler hook to pin (1).

NOTE: Do not torque hex head to greater than

270 N·m (200 lb-ft).

6. Rotate the hex head of the screw mechanism counterclockwise until the adjustable coupler hook contacts the back pin.

CAUTION: Ensure the supplement hex lock is engaged. If this is not locked over the hex head, the screw can turn and the attachment can fall off.

1— Pin

2— Pin

3— Adjustable Coupler Hook

4— Front Coupler Hook

5— Hex Head

6— Supplemental Lock

7. Visually check the coupler to verify that both hooks are firmly in contact with the attachment pins. Ensure the supplemental lock (6) is engaged.

8. Verify the attachment is properly locked by performing a ground test before using.

9. Place the bucket on the ground and uncurl to ensure the attachment is secured to the coupler.

Unlocking Coupler:

1. Position machine and coupler to disconnect from the attachment.

2. Rotate the coupler so that the center of the attachment pin (2) and center of the adjustable coupler hook are in line.

3. Rotate, curl, and lift the attachment slightly off the ground.

4. Rotate the hex head of the screw mechanism clockwise until the adjustable coupler hook is clear from the back pin. Loosen the screw mechanism with the hand rachet to fully release the attachment pin from the coupler.

5. Keeping the attachment close to the ground, slowly retract the bucket cylinder.

6. With the attachment flat on the ground, uncurl the coupler from the attachment. Assure the attachment is on a flat, stable surface and will not move when released from the coupler.

VD76477,00014EB -19-21JUL09-1/1

2-2-21

020113

PN=69


Operating Loader Coupler—If Equipped

CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from unexpected machine motion. The attachment could fall if not properly installed to loader coupler. Operator must be aware of all bystanders at the worksite.

1. Position machine on firm, level ground.

2. Lower boom. Stop machine.

3. Push in and lift loader coupler switch (1) to the “unlock” position to retract coupler pins. Loader coupler pin indicator (2) will illuminate and chime will sound.

4. Operate bucket control to move coupler frame forward.

5.

Drive forward. Guide top of coupler frame into attachment mounting hooks.

6. Raise boom. Tilt mounting frame rearward until attachment is against coupler.

7. Push coupler switch down to the “lock” position to engage coupler pins. Indicator light will turn off and chime will stop sounding.

NOTE: If attachment is not properly latched, disconnect and attach again.

8.

Raise boom. Visually inspect attachment to verify that loader coupler pin plate (3) is pressed against the loader coupler structure (4) and that the pins are engaged in attachment mounting holes.

Left Side Shown

1— Loader Coupler Switch—If

Equipped

2— Loader Coupler Pin


3— Loader Coupler Pin Plate (1 on each side)

4— Loader Coupler Structure

(1 on each side)

VD76477,0001142 -19-06JUL09-1/1

2-2-22

020113

PN=70


Operating Loader

IMPORTANT: Operate loader facing forward in the operator’s seat only.

IMPORTANT: Do not raise or lower the front loader boom while the engine hood is open. Always close the engine hood fully before moving the front loader boom, or severe damage to the engine hood will occur. See Opening and

Closing Engine Hood. (Section 3-2.)

NOTE: Loader control lever will return to neutral if released during normal loader operation.

Push lever in following directions for corresponding loader movements:

NOTE: Loader control lever will detent in “Float” when moved fully forward (A). Loader control lever will stay in “Float” until it is manually moved.

NOTE: Loader control lever will detent in “Return-to-Dig” when bucket is dumped and lever is moved fully left (C). Lever will return to neutral when bucket is in dig position.

Loader control lever will give resistance when boom is raised and lever is held in “Bucket

Roll-Back” (C). Lever will return to neutral when bucket is self-leveled.

Use the “Float” and “Return-to-Dig” detents at the same time to quickly position the front loader bucket for loading, as when driving into a pile of material. When front loader boom and bucket are in correct position, the loader control lever will automatically release from “Return-to-Dig” detent, but will remain in “Float” detent.

For faster cycle times, fully extend lever in desired direction, run engine at fast idle, and move boom and bucket at same time.

Optional Three-Function Controls Shown

A—Boom Lower and Float

B—Boom Raise

C—Bucket Roll-Back and

Return-to-Dig

D—Bucket Dump

VD76477,000138B -19-08JAN07-1/1

2-2-23

020113

PN=71


Operating Differential Lock

CAUTION: Prevent injury from loss of machine control. DO NOT engage differential lock when driving at high speed or steering will be limited.

Avoid machine damage and prevent injury from loss of machine control. DO NOT engage differential lock when turning.

Prevent injury from unexpected machine movement. When poor traction results in one rear tire spinning, slow the tire's rotation before engaging differential lock. Internal axle damage can occur if lock is applied with one rear wheel spinning at high speed.

1— Differential Lock Switch

IMPORTANT: Avoid axle damage. Engage differential lock only while machine is at idle.

The differential lock function has a setting in the Standard

Display Monitor (SDM) called DIFF LOCK SPEED LIMIT,

OFF or On. When enabled (ON) the system automatically disables the differential lock system when engine speed is over 1000 RPM even though the floor switch is engaged.

When the function is disable (OFF) the operator has full control of the differential locking system with the floor switch.

To engage rear differential lock, first, reduce engine speed to idle, then, press down and hold differential lock switch

(1). When rear differential is locked, both rear wheels turn at the same speed.

Unequal traction will keep the rear differential locked. If the differential lock foot switch is released, the differential lock disengages automatically when traction evens out.

Hold differential lock switch continuously to keep rear differential locked when traction is even.

JH91824,00009AD -19-10FEB10-1/1

Operating Mechanical Front Wheel Drive

(MFWD)—If Equipped

IMPORTANT: Prevent possible gear damage.

Mechanical front wheel drive (MFWD) can be engaged and disengaged while driving, except in cases of unequal traction. Machine must be stopped before engaging MFWD during unequal traction.

NOTE: For best performance, fuel economy, and tire wear, operate MFWD only when needed.

To achieve best MFWD performance, be sure front tires are inflated to proper air pressure. See

Tire Inflation Pressures. (Section 3-3.)

NOTE: Whenever the TCL is in the 4F position, MFWD will be automatically disengaged. However, in effort to increase braking performance, MFWD will automatically engage in 4F whenever the service brakes are applied.

Push MFWD switch (1) up to engage MFWD drive shaft.

MFWD indicator (2) will remain lit while MFWD is engaged.

Push MFWD switch down to disengage MFWD.

1— MFWD Switch 2— MFWD Indicator

ER93822,0000077 -19-18DEC07-1/1

2-2-24

020113

PN=72


Lifting

CAUTION: Never move the load suddenly. Never move load over person’s head. DO NOT allow any persons near the load. Keep all persons away from raised load until blocks are supporting it or load is sitting on the ground.

Ensure chain/sling is in good condition and is rated for load being lifted.

1. For maximum lifting capability, attach chain/sling to buckets at positions shown. For capacities of backhoe see Miscellaneous—Specifications. (Section 4-6.)

2. Attach a hand line to load for stability. Use long enough line to ensure that person holding it is a safe distance from load.

3. Before lifting, perform following test of load stability:

NOTE: If using backhoe to lift, raise rear tires off ground

50 mm (2 in.) and ensure machine is level. If ground is soft, place boards or other wide support under stabilizer feet to increase stability.

Lifting With Front Loader

a. Park machine close to load.

b. Attach load to chain/sling.

c. Raise load 50 mm (2 in.) above ground.

d. If using backhoe, swing load all the way to one side.

e. While keeping load close to the ground, extend it away from machine.

If there is any indication of reduced stability of the machine, lower load to the ground and make necessary adjustments

Lifting With Backhoe

so machine can successfully perform test. Do not lift load until machine can perform test at acceptable level.

VD76477,0001207 -19-07MAR07-1/1

Parking the Machine

IMPORTANT: Before stopping engine that has been operating at working load, idle at 1/3 speed for 1—2 minutes to cool hot parts. If engine stalls while operating under load, restart immediately and idle at 1/3 speed for 1—2 minutes before stopping to allow coolant to continue circulating through engine.

IMPORTANT: Turbocharger, if equipped, may be damaged if engine is not properly shut down.

1. Park machine on a level surface.

2. Lower all equipment to ground.

3. Move transmission control lever (TCL) (1) to N.

Transmission Control Lever

1— Transmission Control Lever

(TCL)


VD76477,000112D -19-20SEP10-1/2

2-2-25

020113

PN=73


CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from unexpected machine movement. Never rely on transmission control lever (TCL) and gearshift lever to keep machine from moving. Always engage park brake to hold machine.

4. Push left half of park brake switch (2) to engage park brake.

5. Move engine speed control lever (3) to 1/3 speed and run engine with no load for 1—2 minutes.

6. Move engine speed control lever to slow idle.

7. Turn key switch (4) to “Off” to stop engine. Remove key from key switch.

8. Release hydraulic pressure by moving control levers until equipment does not move.


3— Engine Speed Control

Lever

4— Key Switch

4

2 3

VD76477,000112D -19-20SEP10-2/2

Loading Machine on a Trailer

1. Keep trailer bed clean. Put wheel chocks against trailer wheels.

2. Use a ramp or loading dock. Ramps must be strong enough, have a low angle, and correct height. Load and unload machine on a level surface.

3. Fasten seat belt before starting engine. Allow engine to run for several minutes.

4. Install the extendible dipperstick locking pin, if equipped, and engage the backhoe swing lock.

5. Drive the machine up ramps slowly with centerline of machine over centerline of trailer.

6. Lower loader bucket onto blocks or trailer bed.

7. Lower backhoe boom until bucket rests on trailer bed.

8. Stop engine.

IMPORTANT: Prevent possible hydraulic system damage. Fasten chains or cables to machine at proper locations.

9. Fasten chains or cables from trailer to frame tie-downs.

Do not route chains or cables over or against hydraulic lines or hoses.

Machine Tie Down Locations

10. Fasten backhoe bucket to trailer with chains or cables to prevent movement during transport.

11. Cover engine exhaust pipe opening with tape to keep dust and rain out of pipe.

HG31779,000007C -19-26JAN10-1/1

2-2-26

020113

PN=74


Towing

IMPORTANT: Engine cannot be started by towing.

Damage to transmission may result. DO

NOT tow machine faster than 10 km/hr (6 mph) or any longer than 1 hour.

Towing IS NOT recommended. If you MUST tow machine, use the following procedure:

1. Stop engine.

CAUTION: Prevent possible injury or death from unexpected machine movement. Block wheels to prevent machine movement before disengaging park brake.

A—Cap Screw (4 used)

2. Block tires securely.

3. Attach towing machine and towed machine as closely together as possible with chains.

4. If your machine is equipped with mechanical front wheel drive (MFWD), remove the front axle drive shaft.

5. Move gearshift lever and transmission control lever

(TCL) to N.

6.

Remove front half of rubber mat from floor of operator's station. Remove cap screws (A) and cab floor access plate (B).


B—Cab Floor Access Plate

VD76477,00010F8 -19-09JUL09-1/2

2-2-27

020113

PN=75


IMPORTANT: To avoid damage to park brake assembly from heat build-up, park brake must be manually disengaged.

7. Release park brake manually for towing. Loosen hex nuts (B) and turn both park brake adjustment cap screws (A) completely in.

8. Remove blocks from tires and tow machine.

9. When towing is completed, block tires and engage park brake to hold machine. Turn both park brake adjustment cap screws out to specification (C) as illustrated.

Specification

Park Brake Adjustment

Cap Screw-to-Park Brake

Housing—Distance.................................................................. 27 + 1 mm

1.06 + 0.04 in.

10. Tighten hex nuts to lock cap screws in position.

11. Install central floor access plate and rubber floor mat.

12. Install front axle drive shaft, if removed.

A—Park Brake Adjustment Cap

Screw (2 used)

B—Hex Nut (2 used)

C—Specification

VD76477,00010F8 -19-09JUL09-2/2

2-2-28

020113

PN=76

Maintenance—Machine

Diesel Fuel

Consult your local fuel distributor for properties of the diesel fuel available in your area.

In general, diesel fuels are blended to satisfy the low temperature requirements of the geographical area in which they are marketed.

Diesel fuels specified to EN 590 or ASTM D975 are recommended. Renewable diesel fuel produced by hydrotreating animal fats and vegetable oils is basically identical to petroleum diesel fuel. Renewable diesel that meets EN 590 or ASTM D975 is acceptable for use at all percentage mixture levels.

Required Fuel Properties

In all cases, the fuel shall meet the following properties:

Cetane number of 43 minimum.

Cetane number greater than 47 is preferred, especially for temperatures below

–20°C (–4°F) or elevations above 1500 m (5000 ft.).

Cold Filter Plugging Point

(CFPP) should be at least 5°C

(9°F) below the expected lowest temperature or

Cloud

Point

below the expected lowest ambient temperature.

Fuel lubricity

should pass a maximum scar diameter of

0.45 mm as measured by ASTM D6079 or ISO 12156-1.

Diesel fuel quality and sulfur content

must comply with all existing emissions regulations for the area in which the engine operates. DO NOT use diesel fuel with sulfur content greater than 10 000 mg/kg (10 000 ppm).

Sulfur content for Interim Tier 4 and Stage III B engines

•

Use ONLY ultra low sulfur diesel (ULSD) fuel with a maximum of 15 mg/kg (15 ppm) sulfur content.

Sulfur Content for Tier 3 and Stage III A Engines

•

Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content less than 1000 mg/kg (1000 ppm) is RECOMMENDED

•

Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content 1000–5000 mg/kg

(1000–5000 ppm) REDUCES oil and filter change intervals.

•

BEFORE using diesel fuel with sulfur content greater than 5000 mg/kg (5000 ppm), contact your John Deere dealer

Sulfur Content for Tier 2 and Stage II Engines

•

Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content less than 500 mg/kg (500 ppm) is RECOMMENDED.

•

Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content 500–5000 mg/kg

(500–5000 ppm) REDUCES the oil and filter change interval

•

BEFORE using diesel fuel with sulfur content greater than 5000 mg/kg (5000 ppm), contact your John Deere dealer

Sulfur Content for Other Engines

•

Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content less than 5000 mg/kg (5000 ppm) is recommended.

•

Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content greater than 5000 mg/kg (5000 ppm) REDUCES the oil and filter change intervals.

IMPORTANT: Do not mix used diesel engine oil or any other type of lubricating oil with diesel fuel.

IMPORTANT: Improper fuel additive usage may cause damage on fuel injection equipment of diesel engines.

DX,FUEL1 -19-11APR11-1/1

Lubricity of Diesel Fuel

Most diesel fuels manufactured in the United States,

Canada, and the European Union have adequate lubricity to ensure proper operation and durability of fuel injection system components. However, diesel fuels manufactured in some areas of the world may lack the necessary lubricity.

IMPORTANT: Make sure the diesel fuel used in your machine demonstrates good lubricity characteristics.

If fuel of low or unknown lubricity is used, add John Deere

Fuel-Protect Diesel Fuel Conditioner (or equivalent) at the specified concentration.

Lubricity of Biodiesel Fuel

Fuel lubricity can improve significantly with biodiesel blends up to B20 (20% biodiesel). Further increase in lubricity is limited for biodiesel blends greater than B20.

Fuel lubricity should pass a maximum scar diameter of

0.45 mm as measured by ASTM D6079 or ISO 12156-1.

DX,FUEL5 -19-14APR11-1/1

3-1-1

020113

PN=77

Maintenance—Machine

Handling and Storing Diesel Fuel

CAUTION: Reduce the risk of fire. Handle fuel carefully. DO NOT fill the fuel tank when engine is running. DO NOT smoke while you fill the fuel tank or service the fuel system.

Fill the fuel tank at the end of each day's operation to prevent water condensation and freezing during cold weather.

Keep all storage tanks as full as practicable to minimize condensation.

Ensure that all fuel tank caps and covers are installed properly to prevent moisture from entering. Monitor water content of the fuel regularly.

When using biodiesel fuel, the fuel filter may require more frequent replacement due to premature plugging.

Check engine oil level daily prior to starting engine. A rising oil level may indicate fuel dilution of the engine oil.

IMPORTANT: The fuel tank is vented through the filler cap. If a new filler cap is required, always replace it with an original vented cap.

When fuel is stored for an extended period or if there is a slow turnover of fuel, add a fuel conditioner to stabilize the fuel and prevent water condensation. Contact your fuel supplier for recommendations.

DX,FUEL4 -19-14APR11-1/1

3-1-2

020113

PN=78


Biodiesel Fuel

Biodiesel fuel is comprised of mono-alkyl esters of long chain fatty acids derived from vegetable oils or animal fats. Biodiesel blends are biodiesel mixed with petroleum diesel fuel on a volume basis.

The petroleum diesel portion of all biodiesel blends must meet the requirements of ASTM D975 (US) or EN 590

(EU) commercial standards.

Before using fuel containing biodiesel, review the

Biodiesel Use Requirements and Recommendations in this Operator’s Manual.

Biodiesel users in the U.S. are strongly encouraged to purchase biodiesel blends from a BQ-9000 Certified

Marketer and sourced from a BQ-9000 Accredited

Producer (as certified by the National Biodiesel Board).

Certified Marketers and Accredited Producers can be found at the following website: http://www.bq9000.org.

Environmental laws and regulations can encourage or prohibit the use of biofuels. Operators should consult with appropriate governmental authorities prior to using biofuels.

All John Deere Engines with Exhaust Filter (Released

2011 and After)

Biodiesel contains residual ash. Ash levels exceeding the maximums allowed in either ASTM D6751 or EN14214 can result in more rapid ash loading and require more frequent cleaning of the Exhaust Filter (if present).

While 5% blends (B5) are preferred, biodiesel concentrations up to a 20% blend (B20) in petroleum diesel fuel can be used. Biodiesel blends up to B20 can be used ONLY if the biodiesel (100% biodiesel or

B100) meets ASTM D6751, EN 14214, or equivalent specification. Expect a 2% reduction in power and a 3% reduction in fuel economy when using B20.

The fuel filter can require more frequent replacement, when using biodiesel fuel, particularly if switching from diesel. Check engine oil level daily prior to starting engine.

A rising oil level can indicate fuel dilution of the engine oil.

Biodiesel blends up to B20 must be used within 90 days of the date of biodiesel manufacture. If used, biodiesel blends above B20 must be used within 45 days from the date of biodiesel manufacture.

Biodiesel concentrations above B20 can harm the engine’s emission control systems and should not be used. Risks include, but are not limited to, more frequent stationary regeneration, soot accumulation, and increased intervals for ash removal.

John Deere approved fuel conditioners, which contain detergent and dispersant additives, are required when using B20, and are recommended when using lower biodiesel blends.

When using biodiesel blends up to B20, the following must be considered:

•

Cold weather flow degradation

•

Stability and storage issues (moisture absorption, microbial growth)

•

Possible filter restriction and plugging (usually a problem when first switching to biodiesel on used engines.)

•

Possible fuel leakage through seals and hoses

(primarily an issue with older engines)

•

Possible reduction of service life of engine components

All John Deere Engines Excluding Exhaust Filter

(Primarily Released Prior to 2012)

While 5% blends (B5) are preferred, biodiesel concentrations up to a 20% blend (B20) in petroleum diesel fuel can be used. Biodiesel blends up to B20 can be used ONLY if the biodiesel (100% biodiesel or

B100) meets ASTM D6751, EN 14214, or equivalent specification. Expect a 2% reduction in power and a 3% reduction in fuel economy when using B20.

Request a certificate of analysis from your fuel distributor to ensure that the fuel is compliant with the specifications provided in this Operator’s Manual.

Consult your John Deere dealer for approved fuel conditioners to improve storage and performance with biodiesel fuels.

These John Deere engines can operate on biodiesel blends above B20 (up to 100% biodiesel). Operate at levels above B20 ONLY if the biodiesel is permitted by law and meets the EN 14214 specification (primarily available in Europe). Engines operating on biodiesel blends above

B20 might not fully comply with or be permitted by all applicable emissions regulations. Expect up to a 12% reduction in power and an 18% reduction in fuel economy when using 100% biodiesel.

John Deere approved fuel conditioners, which contain detergent and dispersant additives, are required when using B20, and are recommended when using lower biodiesel blends.

Biodiesel Use Requirements and Recommendations

The following must also be considered if using biodiesel blends above B20:

•

Possible coking or blocked injector nozzles, resulting in power loss and engine misfire if John Deere approved fuel conditioners are not used

•

Possible crankcase oil dilution (requiring more frequent oil changes)

•

Possible lacquering or seizure of internal components

•

Possible formation of sludge and sediments

•

Possible thermal oxidation of fuel at elevated temperatures

•

Possible compatibility issues with other materials

(including copper, lead, zinc, tin, brass, and bronze) used in fuel handling equipment

•

Possible reduction in water separator efficiency

•

Possible damage to paint if exposed to biodiesel


DX,FUEL7 -19-29AUG12-1/2

3-1-3

020113

PN=79


•

Possible corrosion of fuel injection equipment

•

Possible elastomeric seal and gasket material degradation (primarily an issue with older engines)

•

Possible high acid levels within fuel system

•

Because biodiesel blends above B20 contain more ash, using blends above B20 can result in more rapid ash loading and require more frequent cleaning of the

Exhaust Filter (if present)

IMPORTANT: Raw pressed vegetable oils are

NOT acceptable for use as fuel in any concentration in John Deere engines. Their use could cause engine failure.

DX,FUEL7 -19-29AUG12-2/2

Testing Diesel Fuel

A fuel analysis program can help to monitor the quality of diesel fuel. The fuel analysis can provide critical data such as cetane number, fuel type, sulfur content, water content, appearance, suitability for cold weather operations, bacteria, cloud point, acid number, particulate contamination, and whether the fuel meets specification.

Contact your John Deere dealer for more information on diesel fuel analysis.

DX,FUEL6 -19-14APR11-1/1

3-1-4

020113

PN=80


Minimizing the Effect of Cold Weather on Diesel Engines

John Deere diesel engines are designed to operate effectively in cold weather.

However, for effective starting and cold weather operation, a little extra care is necessary. The information below outlines steps that can minimize the effect that cold weather may have on starting and operation of your engine. See your John Deere dealer for additional information and local availability of cold weather aids.

Use Winter Grade Fuel

When temperatures fall below 0°C (32°F), winter grade fuel (No. 1-D in North America) is best suited for cold weather operation. Winter grade fuel has a lower cloud point and a lower pour point.

Cloud point

is the temperature at which wax will begin to form in the fuel and this wax causes fuel filters to plug.

Pour point

is the lowest temperature at which movement of the fuel is observed.

NOTE: On average, winter grade diesel fuel has a lower

Btu (heat content) rating. Using winter grade fuel may reduce power and fuel efficiency, but should not cause any other engine performance effects. Check the grade of fuel being used before troubleshooting for low power complaints in cold weather operation.

Air Intake Heater

An air intake heater is an available option for some engines to aid cold weather starting.

Ether

An ether port on the intake is available to aid cold weather starting.

CAUTION: Ether is highly flammable. Do not use ether when starting an engine equipped with glow plugs or an air intake heater.

Coolant Heater

An engine block heater (coolant heater) is an available option to aid cold weather starting.

Seasonal Viscosity Oil and Proper Coolant

Concentration

Use seasonal grade viscosity engine oil based on the expected air temperature range between oil changes and a proper concentration of low silicate antifreeze as recommended. (See DIESEL ENGINE OIL and ENGINE

COOLANT requirements in this section.)

Diesel Fuel Flow Additive

Use John Deere Fuel-Protect Diesel Fuel Conditioner

(winter formula), which contains anti-gel chemistry, or equivalent fuel conditioner to treat non-winter grade fuel

(No. 2-D in North America) during the cold weather season. This generally extends operability to about 10°C

(18°F) below the fuel cloud point. For operability at even lower temperatures, use winter grade fuel.

IMPORTANT: Treat fuel when outside temperature drops below 0°C (32°F). For best results, use with untreated fuel. Follow all recommended instructions on label.

BioDiesel

When operating with biodiesel blends, wax formation can occur at warmer temperatures. Begin using John Deere

Fuel-Protect Diesel Fuel Conditioner (winter formula) at

5°C (41°F) to treat biodiesel fuels during the cold weather season. Use B5 or lower blends at temperatures below

0°C (32°F). Use only winter grade petroleum diesel fuel at temperatures below -10°C (14°F).

Winterfronts

Use of fabric, cardboard, or solid winterfronts is not recommended with any John Deere engine. Their use can result in excessive engine coolant, oil, and charge air temperatures. This can lead to reduced engine life, loss of power and poor fuel economy. Winterfronts may also put abnormal stress on fan and fan drive components potentially causing premature failures.

If winterfronts are used, they should never totally close off the grill frontal area. Approximately 25% area in the center of the grill should remain open at all times. At no time should the air blockage device be applied directly to the radiator core.

Radiator Shutters

If equipped with a thermostatically controlled radiator shutter system, this system should be regulated in such a way that the shutters are completely open by the time the coolant reaches 93°C (200°F) to prevent excessive intake manifold temperatures. Manually controlled systems are not recommended.

If air-to-air aftercooling is used, the shutters must be completely open by the time the intake manifold air temperature reaches the maximum allowable temperature out of the charge air cooler.

For more information, see your John Deere dealer.

DX,FUEL10 -19-20APR11-1/1

3-1-5

020113

PN=81


Alternative and Synthetic Lubricants

Conditions in certain geographical areas may require lubricant recommendations different from those printed in this manual. Some John Deere brand coolants and lubricants may not be available in your location.

Synthetic lubricants may be used if they meet the performance requirements as shown in this manual.

The temperature limits and service intervals shown in this manual apply to both conventional and synthetic oils.

Re-refined base stock products may be used if the finished lubricant meets the performance requirements.

Avoid mixing different brands or types of oils. Oil manufacturers blend base stock and additives to create their oils and to meet certain specifications and performance requirements. Mixing different oils can interfere with proper functioning of these formulations and degrade lubricant performance.

Consult your authorized John Deere dealer to obtain specific information and recommendations.

AM40430,00000AA -19-03NOV08-1/1

Diesel Engine Break-In™ Oil

New engines are filled at the factory with either John

Deere Break-In™ or Break-In Plus™ Engine Oil. During the break-in period, add John Deere Break-In or Break-In

Plus Engine Oil, respectively, as needed to maintain the specified oil level.

Operate the engine under various conditions, particularly heavy loads with minimal idling, to help seat engine components properly.

Change the oil and filter at 250 hours maximum for

Break-In Oil or 500 hours maximum for Break-In Plus Oil during the initial operation of a new or rebuilt engine.

After engine overhaul, fill the engine with either John

Deere Break-In or Break-In Plus Engine Oil.

If John Deere Break-In or Break-In Plus Engine Oil is not available, use a 10W-30 diesel engine oil meeting one of the following during the first 250 hours of operation:

•

API Service Classification CE

•

API Service Classification CD

•

API Service Classification CC

•

ACEA Oil Sequence E2

•


Break-In is a trademark of Deere & Company.

Break-In Plus is a trademark of Deere & Company

Plus-50 is a trademark of Deere & Company.

IMPORTANT: Do not use Plus-50™ II, Plus-50, or engine oils meeting any of the following for the initial break-in of a new or rebuilt engine:

API CJ-4

API CI-4 PLUS

API CI-4

API CH-4

API CG-4

API CF-4

API CF-2

API CF

ACEA E9

ACEA E7

ACEA E6

ACEA E5

ACEA E4

ACEA E3

These oils will not allow the engine to break in properly.

John Deere Break-In Plus Engine Oil can be used for all

John Deere diesel engines at all emission certification levels.

After the break-in period, use John Deere Plus-50 II, John

Deere Plus-50, or other diesel engine oil as recommended in this manual.

VD76477,0001322 -19-31MAR11-1/1

3-1-6

020113

PN=82


Diesel Engine Oil—Tier 2 and Stage II Engines

Use oil viscosity based on the expected air temperature range during the period between oil changes.

John Deere Plus-50™ II oil is preferred.

John Deere Plus-50 is also recommended.

Other oils may be used if they meet one or more of the following:

•

John Deere Torq-Gard™

•

API Service Category CJ-4

•

API Service Category CI-4 PLUS

•

API Service Category CI-4

•

API Service Category CH-4

•


•


•


•


•


•


Multi-viscosity diesel engine oils are preferred.

Diesel fuel quality and fuel sulfur content must comply with all existing emissions regulations for the area in which the engine operates.

DO NOT use diesel fuel with sulfur content greater than

10 000 mg/kg (10 000 ppm).

Plus-50 is a trademark of Deere & Company

Torq-Gard is a trademark of Deere & Company

50˚C

40˚C

30˚C

20˚C

10˚C

0˚C

-10˚C

-20˚C

-30˚C

-40˚C

122˚F

104˚F

86˚F

68˚F

50˚F

32˚F

14˚F

-4˚F

-22˚F

-40˚F

Oil Viscosities for Air Temperature Ranges

VD76477,00004E2 -19-23MAY12-1/1

3-1-7

020113

PN=83


Diesel Engine Oil and Filter Service Intervals—Tier 2/Stage II Engine

The oil and filter service intervals in the following table should be used as guidelines. Actual service intervals also depend on operation and maintenance practices. It is suggested to use oil analysis to determine the actual useful life of the oil and to aid in selection of the proper oil and filter service interval.

Oil and filter service intervals are based on a combination of oil pan capacity, type of engine oil and filter used, and sulfur content of the diesel fuel.

Fuel Sulfur

Standard Oil

Premium Oil

Fuel Sulfur

Standard Oil

Premium Oil

Engine Oil and Filter Service Intervals

Standard Drain Oil Pan Extended Drain

Oil Pan

Less than 0.05% (500 ppm)

250 hours 250 hours

375 hours 500 hours

0.05 to 0.50% (500 to 5000 ppm)

150 hours 150 hours

275 hours 400 hours

Fuel Sulfur

Standard Oil

0.50% to 1.00% (5000 ppm to 10 000 ppm)

125 hours 125 hours

Premium Oil 187 hours 250 hours

Engine oil analysis is required to determine the actual extended service life of premium oils ACEA E7, ACEA E6, ACEA E5, and ACEA E4.

Diesel fuel sulfur level will affect engine oil and filter service intervals. Higher fuel sulfur levels reduce oil and filter service intervals as shown in the table.

•

Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content less than 0.05%

(500 ppm) is strongly recommended.

PLUS-50 is a trademark of Deere & Company

TORQ-GARD SUPREME is a trademark of Deere & Company

•

Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content 0.05% (500 ppm) to 0.50% (5000 ppm) may result in REDUCED oil and filter change intervals as shown in the table.

•

BEFORE using diesel fuel with sulfur content greater than 0.50% (5000 ppm), contact your John Deere dealer.

IMPORTANT: When using biodiesel blends greater than B20, reduce the oil and filter service interval by 50% or monitor engine oil based on test results from OILSCAN.

Oil types

(premium or standard) in the table include:

•

“Premium Oils” include John Deere PLUS-50™, ACEA

E7, ACEA E6, ACEA E5, or ACEA E4 oils.

•

“Standard Oils” include John DeereTORQ-GARD

SUPREME™, API CJ-4, API CI-4 PLUS, API CI-4, API

CH-4, or ACEA E3 oils.

NOTE: The 500 hour extended oil and filter change interval is only allowed if all of the following conditions are met:

•

Engine equipped with an extended drain interval oil pan

•

Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content less than 0.05% (500 ppm)

•

Use of premium oil: John Deere PLUS-50, ACEA

E7, ACEA E6, ACEA E5, or ACEA E4

•

Perform engine oil analysis to determine the actual extended service life of ACEA E7, ACEA

E6, ACEA E5, and ACEA E4 oils

•

Use of an approved John Deere oil filter

VD76477,00004E3 -19-16JUL10-1/1

3-1-8

020113

PN=84


Diesel Engine Oil—Tier 3 and Stage III A

Engines


John Deere Plus-50™ II oil is preferred.

John Deere Plus-50 is also recommended.


•

John Deere Torq-Gard™

•

API Service Category CJ-4

•

API Service Category CI-4 PLUS

•

API Service Category CI-4

•


•


•


•


•


Multi-viscosity diesel engine oils are preferred.

Diesel fuel quality and fuel sulfur content must comply with all existing emissions regulations for the area in which the engine operates.


10 000 mg/kg (10 000 ppm).


Torq-Gard is a trademark of Deere & Company

50˚C

40˚C

30˚C

20˚C

10˚C

0˚C

-10˚C

-20˚C

-30˚C

-40˚C

122˚F

104˚F

86˚F

68˚F

50˚F

32˚F

14˚F

-4˚F

-22˚F

-40˚F

Oil Viscosities for Air Temperature Ranges

VD76477,00004E4 -19-23MAY12-1/1

3-1-9

020113

PN=85


Diesel Engine Oil and Filter Service Intervals—Tier 3/Stage III A Engine

The oil and filter service intervals in the following table should be used as guidelines. Actual service intervals also depend on operation and maintenance practices. It is suggested to use oil analysis to determine the actual useful life of the oil and to aid in selection of the proper oil and filter service interval.

Oil and filter service intervals are based on a combination of oil pan capacity, type of engine oil and filter used, and sulfur content of the diesel fuel.

Diesel fuel sulfur level

will affect engine oil and filter service intervals. Higher fuel sulfur levels reduce oil and filter service intervals as shown in the table.

•

Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content less than 0.10%

(1000 mg/kg) is strongly recommended.

•

Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content 0.10% (1000 mg/kg) to 0.50% (5000 mg/kg) may result in REDUCED oil and filter change intervals as shown in the table.

•

BEFORE using diesel fuel with sulfur content greater than 0.50% (5000 mg/kg), contact your John Deere dealer.

•


1.00% (10 000 mg/kg).

IMPORTANT: When using biodiesel blends greater than B20, reduce the oil and filter service interval by 50% or monitor engine oil based on test results from Oilscan.

Oil types

in the table include:

•

John Deere Plus-50™ II and John Deere Plus-50

•

“Other Oils” include John Deere Torq-Gard Supreme™,

API CJ-4, API CI-4 PLUS, API CI-4, ACEA E9, ACEA

E7, ACEA E6, ACEA E5, or ACEA E4 oils.

Use of lower specification oils in Tier 3 engines may result in premature engine failure.

NOTE: The 500 hour extended oil and filter change interval is only allowed if all the following conditions are met:

•

Engine equipped with an extended drain interval oil pan

•

Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content less than 0.50% (5000 mg/kg)

•

Use of John Deere Plus-50™ II or John

Deere Plus-50 oil

•

Use of an approved John Deere oil filter

U.S. Tier 3 and EU Stage III A -

PowerTech Plus™

Oil Pan Size (L/kW)

Oil pan capacity Greater than or equal to 0.10

Greater than or equal to 0.12



Fuel Sulfur

Plus-50 375 hours

Less than 0.10% (1000 mg/kg)

500 hours 500 hours 500 hours

Other Oils

Fuel Sulfur

Plus-50

Other Oils

Fuel Sulfur

250 hours

300 hours

200 hours

250 hours 250 hours

0.10 - 0.20% (1000 - 2000 mg/kg)

300 hours

200 hours

500 hours

250 hours

0.20 - 0.50% (2000 - 5000 mg/kg)

250 hours

500 hours

250 hours

U.S. Tier 3 and EU Stage III A -

PowerTech™

Oil Pan Size (L/kW)


375 hours

250 hours

300 hours

200 hours


Less than 0.10% (1000 mg/kg)

500 hours

250 hours

0.10 - 0.20% (1000 - 2000 mg/kg)

400 hours

200 hours


500 hours

250 hours

500 hours

250 hours

0.20 - 0.50% (2000 - 5000 mg/kg)

Plus-50

Other Oils

Fuel Sulfur

Plus-50

250 hours

150 hours

250 hours

150 hours

300 hours

200 hours

0.50 - 1.00% (5000 - 10 000 mg/kg)

500 hours

250 hours

Contact John Deere Dealer (dealer refers to DTAC solutions)

275 hours

150 hours

187 hours

350 hours

175 hours

250 hours

500 hours

250 hours

0.50 - 1.00% (5000 - 10 000 mg/kg)

250 hours

Other Oils Contact John Deere Dealer (dealer refers to DTAC solutions)

125 hours 125 hours 125 hours

The service interval of “Other Oils” may be extended only if oil analysis is performed to determine the actual service life, to a maximum not to exceed that of Plus-50.


Torq-Gard Supreme is a trademark of Deere & Company

PowerTech Plus is a trademark of Deere & Company

PowerTech is a trademark of Deere & Company

VD76477,00004E5 -19-16JUL10-1/1

3-1-10

020113

PN=86


Transmission, Axles, and Mechanical Front

Wheel Drive (MFWD) Oil


The following oils are preferred:

•

John Deere HY-GARD™

•

John Deere Low Viscosity HY-GARD™

Other oils may be used if they meet one of the following:

•

John Deere Standard JDM J20C

•

John Deere Standard JDM J20D

Use the following oil when a biodegradable fluid is required:

•

John Deere BIO-HY-GARD™

HY-GARD is a trademark of Deere & Company

BIO-HY-GARD is a trademark of Deere & Company

Hydraulic Oil


The following oil is preferred:

•

John Deere PLUS-50™

The following oil is also recommended:

•

John Deere TORQ-GARD SUPREME™


•

API Service Classification CH-4

•

API Service Classification CG-4

•

API Service Classification CF-4

•

ACEA Specification E3

•

ACEA Specification E2


TORQ-GARD SUPREME is a trademark of Deere & Company

VD76477,00010CF -19-17JUL07-1/1

VD76477,00010D0 -19-04APR07-1/1

3-1-11

020113

PN=87


Grease

Use grease based on NLGI consistency numbers and the expected air temperature range during the service interval.

John Deere Moly High Temperature/EP Grease is preferred.

The following greases are also recommended:

•

SAE Multipurpose EP Grease containing 3-5% molybdenum disulfide

•

SAE Multipurpose EP Grease

IMPORTANT: Some types of grease thickeners are not compatible with others. Consult your grease supplier before mixing different types of grease.

VD76477,00012D0 -19-19MAY10-1/1

Heavy Duty Diesel Engine Coolant

The engine cooling system is filled to provide year-round protection against corrosion and cylinder liner pitting, and winter freeze protection to -37°C (-34°F). If protection at lower temperatures is required, consult your John Deere dealer for recommendations.

The following engine coolants are preferred:

•

John Deere COOL-GARD™ II Premix

•

John Deere COOL-GARD II PG Premix

Use John Deere COOL-GARD II PG Premix when a non-toxic coolant formulation is required.

Additional Recommended Coolants

The following engine coolant is also recommended:

•

John Deere COOL-GARD II Concentrate in a 40–60% mixture of concentrate with quality water.

John Deere COOL-GARD II Premix, COOL-GARD II PG

Premix, and COOL-GARD II Concentrate coolants do not require use of supplemental coolant additives.

Other Coolants

John Deere COOL-GARD II and COOL-GARD II PG coolants might not be available in the geographical area where service is performed.

If these coolants are unavailable, use a coolant concentrate or prediluted coolant intended for use with heavy duty diesel engines and with a minimum of the following chemical and physical properties:

•

Is formulated with a quality nitrite-free additive package.

•

Provides cylinder liner cavitation protection according to either the John Deere Cavitation Test Method or a fleet study run at or above 60% load capacity

•

Protects the cooling system metals (cast iron, aluminum alloys, and copper alloys such as brass) from corrosion

The additive package must be part of one of the following coolant mixtures:

• ethylene glycol or propylene glycol base prediluted

(40—60%) heavy duty coolant

• ethylene glycol or propylene glycol base heavy duty coolant concentrate in a 40—60% mixture of concentrate with quality water

Water Quality

Water quality is important to the performance of the cooling system. Distilled, deionized, or demineralized water is recommended for mixing with ethylene glycol and propylene glycol base engine coolant concentrate.

IMPORTANT: Do not use cooling system sealing additives or antifreeze that contains sealing additives.

Do not mix ethylene glycol and propylene glycol base coolants.

Do not use coolants that contain nitrites.

COOL-GARD is a trademark of Deere & Company

DX,COOL3 -19-14APR11-1/1

3-1-12

020113

PN=88


Drain Intervals for Diesel Engine Coolant

Drain and flush the cooling system and refill with fresh coolant at the indicated interval, which varies with the coolant used.

John Deere COOL-GARD™ II Premix, COOL-GARD

II PG Premix and COOL-GARD II Concentrate are maintenance free coolants for up to six years or 6000 hours of operation, provided that the cooling system is topped off using only John Deere COOL-GARD II Premix or COOL-GARD II PG Premix.

Test the coolant condition annually with Coolant Test

Strips designed for use with John Deere COOL-GARD

II coolants. If the test strip chart indicates that additive is required, add John Deere COOL-GARD II Coolant

Extender as directed.


If John Deere COOL-GARD™ II Premix, COOL-GARD II

PG Premix, or COOL-GARD II Concentrate is used, but the coolant is not tested OR additives are not replenished by adding John Deere COOL-GARD II Coolant Extender, the drain interval is four years or 4000 hours of operation.

This drain interval only applies to COOL-GARD II coolants that have been maintained within a 40—60% mixture of concentrate with quality water.

If a coolant other than COOL-GARD II, or COOL-GARD

II PG is used, reduce the drain interval to two years or

2000 hours of operation.

DX,COOL11 -19-14APR11-1/1

John Deere COOL-GARD™ II Coolant Extender

Some coolant additives will gradually deplete during engine operation. For John Deere COOL-GARD™ II

Premix, COOL-GARD II PG Premix, and COOL-GARD II

Concentrate, replenish coolant additives between drain intervals by adding John Deere COOL-GARD II Coolant

Extender.

John Deere COOL-GARD II Coolant Extender should not be added unless indicated by coolant testing.

John Deere COOL-GARD II Coolant Extender is a chemically matched additive system for use with all

John Deere COOL-GARD II coolants. John Deere

COOL-GARD II Coolant Extender is not intended for use with nitrite-containing coolants.


IMPORTANT: Do not add a supplemental coolant additive when the cooling system is drained and refilled with any of the following:

•

John Deere COOL-GARD II

•

John Deere COOL-GARD II PG

The use of non-recommended supplemental coolant additives may result in additive drop-out, gelation of the coolant, or corrosion of cooling system components.

Add the recommended concentration of John Deere

COOL-GARD II Coolant Extender. DO NOT add more than the recommended amount.

DX,COOL16 -19-20APR11-1/1

3-1-13

020113

PN=89


Supplemental Coolant Additives

Some coolant additives will gradually deplete during engine operation. For nitrite-containing coolants, replenish coolant additives between drain intervals by adding a supplemental coolant additive as determined necessary by coolant testing.

John Deere Liquid Coolant Conditioner is recommended as a supplemental coolant additive for nitrite-containing coolants.

John Deere Liquid Coolant Conditioner is not designed for use with John Deere COOL-GARD™ II Premix,

COOL-GARD II PG Premix, or COOL-GARD II

Concentrate.

IMPORTANT: Do not add a supplemental coolant additive when the cooling system is drained and refilled with any of the following:


•

John Deere COOL-GARD II

•

John Deere COOL-GARD II PG

If other coolants are used, consult the coolant supplier and follow the manufacturer's recommendation for use of supplemental coolant additives.

The use of non-recommended supplemental coolant additives may result in additive drop-out and gelation of the coolant.

Add the manufacturer's recommended concentration of supplemental coolant additive. DO NOT add more than the recommended amount.

DX,COOL4 -19-14APR11-1/1

Operating in Warm Temperature Climates

John Deere engines are designed to operate using glycol base engine coolants.

Always use a recommended glycol base engine coolant, even when operating in geographical areas where freeze protection is not required.

John Deere COOL-GARD™ II Premix is available in a concentration of 50% ethylene glycol. However, there are situations in warm temperature climates where a coolant with lower glycol concentration (approximately

20% ethylene glycol) has been approved. In these cases, the low glycol formulation has been modified to provide the same level of corrosion inhibitor as John Deere

COOL-GARD II Premix (50/50).


IMPORTANT: Water may be used as coolant

in emergency situations only.

Foaming, hot surface aluminum and iron corrosion, scaling, and cavitation will occur when water is used as the coolant, even when coolant conditioners are added.

Drain cooling system and refill with recommended glycol base engine coolant as soon as possible.

DX,COOL6 -19-03NOV08-1/1

3-1-14

020113

PN=90


Additional Information About Diesel Engine Coolants and John Deere COOL-GARD™

II Coolant Extender

Engine coolants are a combination of three chemical components: ethylene glycol (EG) or propylene glycol

(PG) antifreeze, inhibiting coolant additives, and quality water.

Coolant Specifications

John Deere COOL-GARD™ II Premix either EG or

PG, are fully formulated coolants that contain all three components in their correct concentrations. DO NOT add an initial charge of John Deere COOL-GARD II

Coolant Extender to COOL-GARD II Premix. DO NOT add any other supplemental coolant additive or water to

COOL-GARD II Premix.

John Deere COOL-GARD II Concentrate contains both ethylene glycol and inhibiting coolant additives. Mix this product with quality water, but DO NOT add an initial charge of John Deere COOL-GARD II Coolant Extender or any other supplemental coolant additive.

Replenish Coolant Additives

Some coolant additives will gradually deplete during engine operation. Periodic replenishment of inhibitors is required, even when John Deere COOL-GARD II

Premix or COOL-GARD II Concentrate is used. Follow the recommendations in this manual for the use of John

Deere COOL-GARD II Coolant Extender.

Why use John Deere COOL-GARD II Coolant

Extender?

Operating without proper coolant additives will result in increased corrosion, cylinder liner erosion and pitting, and other damage to the engine and cooling system. A simple mixture of ethylene glycol or propylene glycol and water will not give adequate protection.

John Deere COOL-GARD II Coolant Extender is a chemically matched additive system designed to fortify the proprietary additives used in John Deere COOL-GARD II

Premix and COOL-GARD II Concentrate and to provide optimum protection for up to six years or 6000 hours of operation.


Avoid Automotive-type Coolants

Never use automotive-type coolants (such as those meeting ASTM D3306). These coolants do not contain the correct additives to protect heavy-duty diesel engines. Do not treat an automotive engine coolant with supplemental coolant additives because the high concentration of additives can result in additive fallout.

Water Quality

Water quality is important to the performance of the cooling system. Distilled, deionized, or demineralized water is recommended for mixing with ethylene glycol and propylene glycol base engine coolant concentrate.All

water used in the cooling system should meet the following minimum specifications for quality:

Chlorides

Sulfates

Total dissolved solids

Total hardness pH

<40 mg/L

<100 mg/L

<340 mg/L

<170 mg/L

5.5 to 9.0

Freeze Protection

The relative concentrations of glycol and water in the engine coolant determine its freeze protection limit.

Ethylene Glycol

40%

50%

60%

Propylene Glycol

40%

50%

60%

Freeze Protection Limit

-24°C (-12°F)

-37°C (-34°F)

-52°C (-62°F)

Freeze Protection Limit

-21°C (-6°F)

-33°C (-27°F)

-49°C (-56°F)

DO NOT use a coolant-water mixture greater than 60% ethylene glycol or 60% propylene glycol.

DX,COOL17 -19-20APR11-1/1

3-1-15

020113

PN=91


Testing Diesel Engine Coolant

Maintaining adequate concentrations of glycol and inhibiting additives in the coolant is critical to protect the engine and cooling system against freezing, corrosion, and cylinder liner erosion and pitting.

Test the coolant solution at intervals of 12 months or less and whenever excessive coolant is lost through leaks or overheating.

Coolant Test Strips

Coolant test strips are available from your John Deere dealer. These test strips provide a simple, effective method to check the freeze point and additive levels of your engine coolant.

When Using John Deere COOL-GARD II

John Deere COOL-GARD II Premix™ , COOL-GARD

II PG Premix and COOL-GARD II Concentrate are maintenance free coolants for up to six years or 6000 hours of operation, provided that the cooling system is topped off using only John Deere COOL-GARD II Premix or COOL-GARD II PG premix. Test the coolant condition annually with coolant test strips designed for use with

John Deere COOL-GARD II coolants. If the test strip chart indicates that additive is required, add John Deere

COOL-GARD II Coolant Extender as directed.


Add only the recommended concentration of John Deere

COOL-GARD II Coolant Extender. DO NOT add more than the recommended amount.

When Using Nitrite-Containing Coolants

Compare the test strip results to the supplemental coolant additive (SCA) chart to determine the amount of inhibiting additives in your coolant and whether more John Deere

Liquid Coolant Conditioner should be added.

Add only the recommended concentration of John Deere

Liquid Coolant Conditioner. DO NOT add more than the recommended amount.

Coolant Analysis

For a more thorough evaluation of your coolant, perform a coolant analysis. The coolant analysis can provide critical data such as freezing point, antifreeze level, pH, alkalinity, nitrite content (cavitation control additive), molybdate content (rust inhibitor additive), silicate content, corrosion metals, and visual assessment.

Contact your John Deere dealer for more information on coolant analysis.

DX,COOL9 -19-11APR11-1/1

3-1-16

020113

PN=92

Maintenance—Periodic Maintenance

Service Machine at Specified Intervals

Lubricate and make service checks and adjustments at intervals shown on the periodic maintenance chart (A), greasing maintenance chart (B), and in the maintenance sections.

Perform service on items at multiples of the original requirement. For example, at 500 hours also service those items (if applicable) listed under 250 hours, 100 hours, and 10 hours or daily.

Intervals shown on charts and in this manual are for normal conditions. If operating in difficult conditions, service at shorter intervals.

A—Periodic Maintenance Chart B—Greasing Maintenance

Chart

CED,OUO1079,418 -19-14DEC06-1/1

Check Hour Meter Regularly

Check the hour meter (1) in the display window to determine when the machine needs periodic maintenance.

To check the hour meter, turn the key switch on and press the SELECT button until the hour meter is displayed.

To check the hour meter with the key switch off, press and hold the SELECT button.

1— Hour Meter

VD76477,00010F9 -19-10JUL09-1/1

Prepare Machine for Maintenance

IMPORTANT: Improperly disposing of waste can threaten the environment and ecology.

Potentially harmful waste used with John

Deere equipment includes such items as oil, fuel, coolant, brake fluid, filters, and batteries.

Do not pour waste onto the ground, down a drain, or into any water source.

Before performing procedures in the maintenance chapters and before leaving the operator’s seat, park the machine, and release hydraulic pressure.

CAUTION: Prevent serious injury or death from unexpected machine movement. Always install the loader boom service lock, or lower the front loader boom fully to the ground, and move control levers to release hydraulic pressure before working near the front of the machine.

See Loader Boom Service Lock in this section for installation instructions.

Raise the front loader boom and install the loader boom service lock before performing maintenance in the engine compartment. See Loader Boom Service Lock in this section.

If the machine is equipped with ride control, discharge hydraulic pressure from the ride control system before performing maintenance. See Discharge Ride Control

System Hydraulic Pressure—If Equipped. (Section 4-1.)

CED,OUO1079,419 -19-18JAN02-1/1

3-2-1

020113

PN=93

Maintenance—Periodic Maintenance

Engine Identification

Use the following information to identify the engine as either a Tier 3/Stage IIIA or Tier 2/Stage II engine.

Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine Component Identification

Machines equipped with Tier 3/Stage IIIA engines have surge tank (1) mounted at rear of engine compartment and charge air cooler (2) on top right side of engine.

Tier 3/Stage IIIA engine machines have a different placement of muffler (3) and air cleaner (4) than Tier

2/Stage II engines.

1— Surge Tank

2— Charge Air Cooler

3— Muffler

4— Air Cleaner

Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine (left side view)

Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine (right side view)


Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine (detail)

MD04263,000013E -19-20FEB09-1/3

3-2-2

020113

PN=94


Tier 2/Stage II Engine Component Identification

Machines equipped with Tier 2/Stage II engines have surge tank (1) mounted at front of engine compartment, and do not use a charge air cooler.

Tier 3/Stage IIIA engine machines have a different placement of muffler (3) and air cleaner (4) than Tier

2/Stage II engines.

1— Surge Tank

3— Muffler

4— Air Cleaner

Tier 2/Stage II Engine (left side view)

Tier 2/Stage II Engine (right side view)


Tier 2/Stage II Engine (detail)

MD04263,000013E -19-20FEB09-2/3

3-2-3

020113

PN=95


Engine Serial and Model Number Identification

The engine serial number plate (7) is located on the right rear of the engine block.

The fifth digit of the engine model number can be used to identify an engine as either Tier 3/Stage IIIA or Tier 2/Stage

II based on aspiration method for this machine application.

Engine Model Number

4045

H

T054

H

........................................

4045

T

T095

T

.........................................

Turbocharger and air-to-water aftercooled (Tier 3/Stage IIIA engine)

Turbocharged, no aftercooling

(Tier 2/Stage II engine)

5— Engine Serial Number

6— Engine Model Number

7— Engine Serial Number Plate

Engine Serial Number Plate Location

Engine Serial Number Plate—Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine

Engine Serial Number Plate—Tier 2/Stage II Engine

MD04263,000013E -19-20FEB09-3/3

3-2-4

020113

PN=96


Loader Boom Service Lock

Install loader boom service lock when front loader must be raised for service procedures.

IMPORTANT: Do not raise or lower the front loader boom while the engine hood is open. Always close the engine hood fully before moving the front loader boom, or severe damage to the engine hood will occur.

Installing the Loader Boom Service Lock


2. Empty loader bucket and move bucket to dump position.

3. Raise boom until loader boom service lock can fit over cylinder rod.

4. Stop engine.

5. Remove cotter pin and retaining pin, and lower loader boom service lock onto cylinder rod.

6. Install retaining pin and cotter pin to attach loader boom service lock on cylinder rod.

7. Slowly lower boom until its weight settles onto the loader boom service lock.

Removing the Loader Boom Service Lock


2. Start engine and raise boom slightly to allow clearance between loader boom service lock and cylinder.

3. Remove cotter pin and retaining pin.

4. Lift loader boom service lock to storage position, and install retaining pin and cotter pin to retain.

HG31779,000007D -19-14MAY02-1/1

Opening and Closing Engine Hood


IMPORTANT: Do not raise or lower front loader boom while the engine hood is open. Always close engine hood fully before moving front loader boom, or severe damage to hood will occur.

NOTE: The engine hood can be partially opened when the front loader boom is lowered fully to the ground. To fully open the engine hood, the front loader boom must be fully raised and the loader boom service lock must be installed.

Push hood tilt latch (1) and lift hood to open.

Pull hood support (2) and slowly lower hood to close.

1— Hood Tilt Latch 2— Hood Support

VD76477,0001132 -19-20OCT06-1/1

Fuel Tank

CAUTION: Handle fuel carefully. If the engine is hot or running, DO NOT fill the fuel tank.

DO NOT smoke while filling fuel tank or working on fuel system.

To avoid condensation, fill the fuel tank at the end of each day’s operation. Shut off engine before filling.

Specification

Fuel Tank—Capacity....................................................................... 155 L

41 gal

VD76477,00011F7 -19-07MAR07-1/1

3-2-5

020113

PN=97


Fluid Analysis Program Test Kits and 3-Way

Coolant Test Kit

Fluid Analysis Program Test Kits and the 3-Way Coolant

Test Kit are John Deere fluid sampling products to help you monitor machine maintenance and system condition. The objective of a fluid sampling program is to ensure machine availability when you need it and to reduce repair costs by identifying potential problems before they become critical.

Engine, hydraulic, power train, and coolant samples should be taken from each system on a periodic basis, usually prior to a filter and/or fluid change interval. Certain systems require more frequent sampling. Consult your authorized John Deere dealer on a maintenance program for your specific application. Your authorized John Deere dealer has the sampling products and expertise to assist you in lowering your overall operating costs through fluid sampling.

Fluid Analysis Kits

AM40430,00002FE -19-19OCT11-1/1

3-2-6

020113

PN=98


Service Intervals

Model: 310J and 310SJ

Hour Meter Reading:

PIN/Serial Number:

SERVICE INTERVALS

Service your machine at intervals shown on this chart. Also, perform service on items at multiples of the original requirement. For example, at 500 hours also service those items listed under 250 hours, 100 hours, 50 hours, and 10 hours or daily.

FLUID SAMPLING

Take fluid samples from each system as indicated on this form. The manufacturer of the fluid analysis kits will provide maintenance recommendations based upon the results of the fluid analysis and the operating information you supply. Regular fluid sampling extends the operational life of your machine.

□ Inspect tires and check pressure

As Required

□ Clean or replace engine air cleaner elements

□ Check wheel fasteners

□ Clean or replace cab fresh air and recirculation filters (if equipped)

□ Grease MFWD drive shaft spline (if equipped)

□ Grease non-powered front wheel bearings (if equipped)

□ Drain water and sediment from water separators □ Add coolant extender as indicated by COOL-GARD™ II test strips

□ Drain water and sediment from auxiliary water separator fuel filter (if equipped)

□ Check hydraulic reservoir oil level

□ Check engine oil level

□ Check coolant level

□ Inspect fuel water sediment bowls

□ Grease loader pivot points

□ Grease loader quick coupler (if equipped)

□ Grease front axle pivot pin

□ Grease stabilizer pivots and cylinder pins

Every 10 Hours or Daily

□ Grease backhoe boom, crowd cylinders and pivots

□ Grease backhoe bucket cylinder and pivots

□ Grease backhoe swing cylinder and pivots

□ Grease MFWD front axle and U-joints (if equipped)

□ Grease non-powered front axle steering pivots (if equipped)

□ Grease multipurpose bucket pivots (if equipped)

□ Grease backhoe coupler (if equipped)

□ Check transmission oil level

Every 50 Hours

□ Grease backhoe coupler fittings (if equipped)

Initial Service—250 Hours

1

□ Change engine break-in oil and replace filter

1

Perform initial service once after the first 250 hours of operation.

□ Check MFWD planetary housing oil level (if equipped)

□ Check MFWD front axle housing oil level (if equipped)

□ Check battery electrolyte level and tighten terminals

Every 250 Hours

□ Check rear axle oil level

□ Take engine oil sample

□ Check air intake hose

□ Check boom-to-dipperstick pin bolt torque

□ Drain water and sediment from fuel tank

□ Change engine oil and replace filter

□ Replace fuel filters

□ Replace auxiliary water separator fuel filter (if equipped)

Every 500 Hours

□ Clean engine crankcase vent tube

□ Take rear axle oil sample

□ Take diesel fuel sample

□ Take transmission oil sample

□ Take hydraulic oil sample

□ Take engine coolant sample

□ Replace hydraulic reservoir breather

□ Replace engine air cleaner elements

□ Replace cab, fresh air and recirculation filters (if equipped)

□ Inspect serpentine belt

Every 1000 Hours

□ Replace hydraulic oil filter

□ Replace fuel breather

□ Change transmission oil and replace filter

□ Check coolant


CS58540,0000049 -19-17MAY10-1/2

3-2-7

020113

PN=99


□ Clean, pack, and adjust non-powered front wheel bearings (if equipped)

□ Adjust engine valve lash

□ Drain and refill MFWD front axle housing oil (if equipped)

□ Drain and refill MFWD planetary housing oil (if equipped)


□ Drain and refill hydraulic reservoir oil

□ Drain and refill rear axle and planetary oil

□ Inspect and clean hydraulic reservoir fill screen


□ Drain and refill cooling system


CS58540,0000049 -19-17MAY10-2/2

3-2-8

020113

PN=100


Required Parts

REQUIRED PARTS

Ensure machine performance and availability; use only genuine John Deere parts. Verify part numbers are current and that any associated parts are also on hand, i.e., filter O-rings.

Engine Oil Filter

Auxiliary Water Separator Fuel Filter (if equipped)

Description

Part

Number

RE504836

AT365870

Initial

Service

1

250

Hours

-

1

Every

250

Hours

Every

500

Hours

1

1

Every

1000

Hours

1

1

Every

2000

Hours

1

1

Every

6000

Hours

1

1

Hydraulic Oil Filter

Hydraulic Reservoir Breather

Fuel Breather

Transmission Oil Filter

AT308274

AT101565

AM107314

AT179323

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Cab Fresh Air Filter

Cab Recirculation Filter

AT191102

AT184590

Engine 4045DT054

•

Primary Fuel Filter

•

Final Fuel Filter

•

Engine Rocker Arm Cover Gasket

•

Air Filter Element―Primary

RE529643

RE522878

R524468

AT332908

•

Air Filter Element―Secondary

AT332909

•

Engine Air Cleaner Dust Unloader Valve

T179504

Engine 4045DT060

•

Final Fuel Filter

RE509031

•


•


R123542

KV16429

•


AT171854

•


R48568

Engine 4045TT094

•

Final Fuel Filter

•


•


RE509031

R524480

KV16429

•


AT171854

•


R48568

COOL-GARD™ II Pre-Mix:

Tier 2/Stage II Engine TY26575

Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine TY26575

1

1

1

1

As Required

As Required

As Required

As Required

As Required

As Required

As Required

As Required

As Required

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

21.0 L

(5.5 gal.)

25.0 L

(6.6 gal.)

Coolant Extender

John Deere PLUS-50™ II Engine Oil

John Deere PLUS-50™ Hydraulic Oil

TY26603

TY26674

2

TY6389

2

13.0 L

(3.5 gal.)

As Required

13.0 L

(3.5 gal.)

13.0 L

(3.5 gal.)

13.0 L

(3.5 gal.)

39.0 L

(10.3 gal.)

13.0 L

(3.5 gal.)

39.0 L

(10.3 gal.)

HY-GARD™ Transmission Oil:

Transmission Oil TY6354

2

15.0 L

(4.0 gal.)

MFWD Front Axle Housing and Planetary Oil

(if equipped)

Rear Axle Housing and Planetary Oil

TY6354

2

TY6354

2

15.0 L

(4.0 gal.)

8.5 L

(2.25 gal.)

18.0 L

(4.8 gal.)

15.0 L

(4.0 gal.)

8.5 L

(2.25 gal.)

18.0 L

(4.8 gal.)

Fluid Analysis Kits

3

Diesel Engine Oil AT346594 1 1 1 1 1


CS58540,000004A -19-06JUN12-1/2

3-2-9

020113

PN=101


Description

Part

Number

Initial

Service

1

250

Hours

-

Every

250

Hours

Every

500

Hours

Every

1000

Hours

Every

2000

Hours

Hydraulic Oil

Transmission and Rear Axle Oil

Diesel Fuel

Engine Coolant

AT346594

AT346594

AT180344

TY26873

1

2

1

1

1

2

1

1

1

2

1

1

COOL-GARD™ II Test Strips TY26605 1 1

1

Perform initial service once after the first 250 hours of operation.

2

For recommended oil type and oil viscosities based on operating temperatures see Maintenance—Machine. (Section 3-1.)

3

Based on fluid analysis results, intervals may need to be adjusted for your operating conditions. Consult your local John Deere dealer.

Every

6000

Hours

1

1

1

2

1




CS58540,000004A -19-06JUN12-2/2

3-2-10

020113

PN=102

Maintenance—As Required

Check Tire Pressure

CAUTION: Explosive separation of a tire and rim parts can cause serious injury or death.

Only attempt to mount a tire if you have the proper equipment and experience to perform the job. Have it done by your John Deere dealer or a qualified repair service.

Always maintain the correct tire pressure. DO

NOT inflate the tires above the recommended pressure. NEVER cut or weld on an inflated tire or rim assembly, rim, or rim parts. Heat from welding could cause an increase in pressure and may result in a tire explosion.

When inflating tires, use a clip-on chuck and extension hose long enough to allow you to stand to one side and NOT in front of or over the tire assembly. Use a safety cage if available.

Inspect tires and wheels daily. DO NOT operate with low pressure, cuts, bubbles, damaged rims, or missing lug bolts and nuts.

Check tire pressure with an accurate gauge having 6.9

kPa (0.07 bar) (1 psi) graduations. If tires contain liquid ballast, use a special air-water gauge and measure with valve stem at bottom.

When inflating tires be sure to lock air chuck to valve stem and stand to front or rear of tire.

TX,55,BD2138 -19-07OCT96-1/1

3-3-1

020113

PN=103

Tire Inflation Pressures

Shipping pressure may not be the same as operating pressure. You may change tire pressures to suit working condition according to tire manufacturer’s recommendations.

IMPORTANT: The tire pressure stamped on the sidewall of a tire is the manufacturers recommended pressure for that specific tire.

If there is a pressure difference between the sidewall stamp and the chart below use the pressure listed below. The pressures below have been approved by the tire manufacturer.

The pressure difference on these tires may be to alleviate tire squat, improve stability, and or prevent premature tire failure.

NOTE: Some or of these tires options may not be available on specific backhoe models.

Maintenance—As Required

Front Axle

Tire Size

10.5/80-18

11L-15

11L-16

12.5/80-18 12PR

12.5/80-18 10PR

12-16.5 8PR

12-16.5 10PR R-3

12-16.5 10PR SS

12-16.5 10PR NHS

14.5/75-16.1

15-19.5

16.5L-16.1

340/80R18 IT530

(310SJ and 310SJ TMC only)

340/80R18 IT530

340/80R18 XMCL

LT245/75R16

Tire Inflation Pressures

414 kPa

4.1 bar

60 psi

345 kPa

3.4 bar

50 psi

276 kPa

2.8 bar

40 psi

276 kPa

2.8 bar

40 psi

317 kPa

3.2 bar

46 psi

400 kPa

4.0 bar

58 psi

448 kPa

4.5 bar

65 psi

448 kPa

4.5 bar

65 psi

276 kPa

2.8 bar

40 psi

276 kPa

2.8 bar

40 psi

276 kPa

2.8 bar

40 psi

Pressure

372 kPa

3.7 bar

54 psi

303 kPa

3.0 bar

44 psi

441 kPa

4.4 bar

64 psi

414 kPa

4.1 bar

60 psi


3-3-2

TX18203,00004C1 -19-27JUL12-1/2

020113

PN=104


Tire Size

16.9-28

(310J, 310SJ and 310SJ TMC only)

16.9-28

19.5L-24 10PR R-3

19.5L-24 10PR R-4

19.5L-24 12PR

19.5L-244 10PR

19.5L-244 16PR

19.5L-249

20.5-25 12PR L-2

20.5-25 12PR L-3

20.5-25 XTLA

21L-24 10PR

21L-24 12PR

21L-28

500/70R24 IT530

500/70R24 XMCL

540/70R24

Rear Axle

Tire Inflation Pressures

248 kPa

2.5 bar

36 psi

427 kPa

4.3 bar

62 psi

179 kPa

1.8 bar

26 psi

234 kPa

2.3 bar

34 psi

248 kPa

2.5 bar

36 psi

317 kPa

3.2 bar

46 psi

317 kPa

3.2 bar

46 psi

317 kPa

3.2 bar

46 psi

Pressure

193 kPa

1.9 bar

28 psi

221 kPa

2.2 bar

32 psi

165 kPa

1.7 bar

24 psi

193 kPa

1.9 bar

28 psi

234 kPa

2.3 bar

34 psi

179 kPa

1.8 bar

26 psi

276 kPa

2.8 bar

40 psi

248 kPa

2.5 bar

36 psi

241 kPa

2.4 bar

35 psi

TX18203,00004C1 -19-27JUL12-2/2

3-3-3

020113

PN=105


Check Wheel Fasteners

IMPORTANT: Prevent possible machine damage.

Fasteners should be clean and dry. Do not lubricate fasteners. Start fasteners by hand to prevent cross threading.

Continue to check torque at 50—100 hour intervals until torque is maintained.

Check front and rear wheel fasteners (1 and 2) according to specification.

1. Inspect all parts for damage. Replace parts as necessary.

2. When replacing clean lug nuts and tapped studs. Use compressed air to dry all parts.

3. Tighten fasteners in a star pattern until wheel is drawn up to hub.

4. Tighten fasteners in a star pattern to full torque.

5. Continue to check torque at 50—100 hour intervals until torque is maintained.

Specification

Rear Wheel

Nuts—Torque............................................................................. 725 N•m

535 lb.-ft

MFWD Front Wheel-to-

Hub Nuts—Torque...................................................................... 725 N•m

535 lb.-ft

315SJ Shown

1— Front Wheel Fastener (8 used per tire)

2— Rear Wheel Fastener (10 used per tire)

Non-Powered Front

Wheel-to-Hub Cap

Screws

(11L x 16 Tire Size)

—Torque..................................................................................... 126 N•m

170 lb.-ft

Non-Powered Front

Wheel-to-Hub Cap

Screws

(14.5/75 -16.1 Tire

Size)—Torque............................................................................. 290 N•m

214 lb.-ft

KR46761,0000796 -19-31OCT12-1/1

Clean Cab Air Filters—If Equipped

Cab Fresh Air Filter

1. Open latch (A) on inside of right-side window frame.

2. Remove fresh air filter cover (B) and fresh air filter.

3. Inspect filter. Clean as necessary. Replace if damaged.

4. Install filter and filter cover.

5. Close latch.

A—Latch B—Fresh Air Filter Cover


VD76477,000119F -19-09JUL09-1/2

3-3-4

020113

PN=106


Cab Recirculating Air Filter

1. Remove cab recirculating air filter cover (C) and cab recirculating air filter.

2. Inspect filter. Clean as necessary. Replace if damaged.

3. Install filter and filter cover.

Cleaning Cab Air Filters

CAUTION: Reduce compressed air to less than

210 kPa (2.10 bar) (30 psi) when using for cleaning purposes. Clear area of bystanders, guard against flying debris, and wear personal protection equipment, including eye protection.

NOTE: Always replace damaged air filters.

Clean filter(s) using one of the following methods:

•

Direct compressed air through filter(s), opposite normal air flow.

C—Cab Recirculating Air Filter

Cover

•

Tap filter(s) on a flat surface with dirty side down.

•

Wash in warm, soapy water and flush. Let filter(s) dry before reinstalling.

VD76477,000119F -19-09JUL09-2/2

3-3-5

020113

PN=107


Drain Water and Sediment from Water

Separator

1. Place container under primary fuel filter drain valve

(1) to collect waste.

2. Loosen valve and allow water and sediment to drain from fuel filter assembly.

3. Tighten valve. Dispose of waste properly.

4. Place container under final fuel filter drain valve (2) to collect waste. (Tier 3/Stage IIIA engine only).

5. Loosen valve and allow water and sediment to drain from fuel filter assembly.

6. Tighten valve. Dispose of waste properly.

1— Primary Fuel Filter Drain

Valve

2— Final Fuel Filter Drain Valve


Drain Auxiliary Water Separator Fuel

Filter—If Equipped

1. Place container under drain hose (4).

2. Loosen air vent (2) and drain valve (3). Drain water, fuel, and sediment into container. Dispose of waste properly.

3. Tighten drain valve.

4. Bleed fuel system with fuel priming pump button (1) until air is vented.

5. Tighten air vent.

6. Operate engine and check for leaks.

1— Fuel Priming Pump Button

(hand operated)

2— Air Vent

3— Drain Valve

4— Drain Hose

3

4


MD04263,000013F -19-20FEB09-1/1

1

2

3-3-6

MD04263,0000140 -19-20FEB09-1/1

020113

PN=108


Clean or Replace Air Cleaner Elements—Tier

3/Stage IIIA Engine

1. Open engine hood.

2. Remove air cleaner cover by releasing clips (1).

3. Remove primary element (2).

IMPORTANT: A damaged or dirty element may cause engine damage.

Install a new primary element:

1. If the element shows damage.

2. If element will not clean.

3. After 1000 hours service or annually.

Install a new secondary element (3):

1. If the primary element is damaged and needs to be replaced.

2. If the element is visibly dirty.


DO NOT clean a secondary element. Install a new element carefully centering it in the canister.

4. Inspect element and gasket for damage. If air filter restriction indicator is lit, see Inspecting and Cleaning

Dusty Secondary and Primary Element. (Section 4-1.)

NOTE: Air restriction indicator will not signal correctly if an element has a break or is not correctly sealed in air cleaner housing. Throw away element that has the slightest damage. If gasket is broken or missing, install a new element.

1— Clip (3 used)

2— Primary Element

3— Secondary Element

MD04263,000011E -19-07JUL09-1/1

3-3-7

020113

PN=109


Clean or Replace Air Cleaner Elements—Tier

2/Stage II Engine


2. Remove air cleaner cover by releasing clips (1).

3. Remove primary element (2).


Install a new primary element:

1. If the element shows damage.

2. If element will not clean.


Install a new secondary element (3):

1. If the primary element is damaged and needs to be replaced.

2. If the element is visibly dirty.



4. Inspect element and gasket for damage. If air filter restriction indicator is lit, See Inspecting and Cleaning

Dusty Secondary and Primary Element. (Section 4-1.)





Grease MFWD Drive Shaft Splines—If

Equipped

IMPORTANT: Lubricate daily when machine is used in mud to minimize wear and corrosion.

Apply grease to lubrication fitting (1) until it escapes from joint. See Grease. (Section 3-1.)

1— Lubrication Fitting

MD04263,000011F -19-07JUL09-1/1

3-3-8

CED,TX03768,2667 -19-09JUL09-1/1

020113

PN=110


Grease Non-Powered Front Wheel

Bearings—If Equipped

IMPORTANT: Lubricate daily when machine is used in mud to minimize wear and corrosion.

1. Remove plug and install lubrication fitting.

2. Grease with approximately five low pressure strokes of grease. See Grease. (Section 3-1.)

3. Remove lubrication fitting and install plug.

VD76477,00010F1 -19-09JUL09-1/1

3-3-9

020113

PN=111


Check Coolant

CAUTION: Explosive release of fluids from pressurized cooling system can cause serious burns.

Remove surge tank cap only when engine is cold or when cool enough to touch with bare hands. Slowly loosen cap to relieve pressure before removing completely.

IMPORTANT: John Deere COOL-GARD™ II

Coolant Extender does not protect against freezing. Coolant extender prevents rust, scale, and liner cavitation.

NOTE: Check coolant every 1000 hours or 1 year, or when replacing 1/3 or more of coolant. Add coolant extender as necessary.

1. Remove surge tank cap (1) and test coolant solution.

Use one of the following kits to check coolant.

•

3-Way Heavy Duty Coolant Test Kit

Coolant test strips provide an effective method to check freeze point and additive levels of engine coolant. See your authorized dealer for 3-Way Heavy

Duty Coolant Test Kit and follow instructions on kit.

•

COOLSCAN PLUS

™

For a more thorough evaluation of coolant, perform

COOLSCAN PLUS analysis, where available.

See your authorized dealer for information about

COOLSCAN PLUS.

2. Add John Deere COOL-GARD Coolant Extender as necessary. Follow instructions on container for amount.

Specification

Tier 3/Stage IIIA

Engine—Capacity.............................................................................. 25 L

6.6 gal

Tier 2/Stage II


5.5 gal

3. Install surge tank cap.


COOLSCAN PLUS is a trademark of Deere & Company

1— Surge Tank Cap



MD04263,0000350 -19-07MAY09-1/1

3-3-10

020113

PN=112

Maintenance—Every 10 Hours or Daily

Check Hydraulic Reservoir Oil Level

NOTE: Check hydraulic oil level with machine parked on a level surface. Check before starting engine, with backhoe and stabilizers in transport position, and front loader bucket lowered to ground.

Check when oil is cool.

Sight glass decal has a scale for proper level of oil.

1. Stop engine. Allow time for hydraulic oil to cool.

2. Check oil level in sight glass (1). Oil level should be in mid-range of decal.

1— Sight Glass

MD04263,0000142 -19-20FEB09-1/2

Adding Oil to the Hydraulic Reservoir

1. If oil is below operating range in ADD range, remove fill cap (B) and add oil.

2. Install fill cap.

B—Fill Cap



MD04263,0000142 -19-20FEB09-2/2

3-4-1

020113

PN=113

Maintenance—Every 10 Hours or Daily

Check Engine Oil Level

IMPORTANT: Prevent possible engine damage.

DO NOT run engine when oil level is below the ADD mark.

The most accurate oil level reading is obtained when engine is cold before operation.

1. Park machine on a level surface. Engage park brake.


2. Raise front loader boom and install loader boom service lock.

3. Stop engine.

4. Fully open engine hood.

5. Remove engine oil dipstick (1) and check oil level.

BEFORE THE ENGINE IS STARTED: Engine is full when oil level is within cross-hatched area (3). It is acceptable to run engine as long as oil level is above the ADD mark.

AFTER THE ENGINE HAS BEEN RUN: Allow oil to drain into oil pan for 10 minutes before checking the oil level. Ten minutes after shutdown, oil level must be above the ADD mark.

6. Remove engine oil fill cap (2) and add oil as necessary.

See Diesel Engine Oil. (Section 3-1.)

7. Check oil level and add oil as necessary.


1— Engine Oil Dipstick

2— Engine Oil Fill Cap

3— Cross-Hatched Area



ADD

3

FULL

MD04263,0000143 -19-20FEB09-1/1

3-4-2

020113

PN=114


Check Coolant Level

CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from hot spraying coolant. Remove surge tank cap only when cool enough to touch with bare hands.

Then loosen cap slowly to stop so pressure is released from system before removing cap.

1. With engine cold, coolant level must be between MAX

COLD and MIN COLD marks on coolant surge tank (1).

2. If coolant is below MIN COLD mark, add coolant to surge tank.

3. If surge tank is empty, check for leaks and repair as necessary. Add coolant at surge tank cap. See Diesel

Engine Coolant. (Section 3-1.)

1— Coolant Surge Tank



MD04263,0000144 -19-20FEB09-1/1

3-4-3

020113

PN=115


Inspect Fuel Water Sediment Bowls

Inspect bowls for contaminants.

For draining procedure see Drain Water and Sediment from Water Separators. (Section 3-3.)

1— Final Fuel Filter Sediment

Bowl

2— Auxiliary Fuel Filter

Sediment Bowl—If

Equipped

3— Primary Fuel Filter

Sediment Bowl


3-4-4


MB60223,00000ED -19-23APR09-1/1

020113

PN=116


Grease Loader Pivots

NOTE: Machines equipped with synthetic bushings do not require lubrication.

Apply grease to lubrication fittings until it escapes from joints. See Grease. (Section 3-1.)

6 Points—Left Side Shown

5 Points

3-4-5


VD76477,00010EC -19-10JUL09-1/1

020113

PN=117


Grease Multipurpose Bucket Pivots—If

Equipped



CED,OUO1079,581 -19-03JUN09-1/1

Grease Stabilizer Pivots and Cylinder Pins

Apply grease to lubrication fittings until it escapes from joint. See Grease. (Section 3-1.)

4 points—Left Side Shown

OUO1079,000025C -19-16APR02-1/1

3-4-6

020113

PN=118


Grease Backhoe Boom, Crowd Cylinders and Pivots

3 Points—Optional Cab Shown


2 Points

3 Points—Right Side Shown

MD04263,00002F9 -19-18MAR09-1/1

3-4-7

020113

PN=119


Grease Backhoe Bucket Cylinder and Pivots


1 Point

Grease Backhoe Swing Cylinder and Pivots


6 Points - Right Side Shown

MD04263,00002FA -19-27SEP10-1/1

3-4-8

8 Points—Right Side Shown

MD04263,00003E3 -19-13MAY09-1/1

020113

PN=120


Grease Loader Quick Coupler—If Equipped



HG31779,000005F -19-20DEC06-1/1

Grease Non-Powered Front Axle Steering

Pivots—If Equipped

Apply grease to lubrication fittings on steering pivots until it escapes from joints.

See Grease. (Section 3-1.)


MD04263,0000351 -19-16APR09-1/1

Grease MFWD Front Axle and Universal

Joints—If Equipped

Apply grease to lubrication fittings until it escapes from joint.


3-4-9


HG31779,00001DA -19-24JAN03-1/1

020113

PN=121


Grease Backhoe Coupler Mechanical

Jack—If Equipped

Apply grease to each lubrication fitting until it escapes from the joint.

2 Points

MD04263,0000352 -19-03APR09-1/1

Grease Front Axle Pivot Pin

Apply two pumps of grease to lubrication fitting on right side of frame to lubricate axle oscillating pivot.


1 Point

VD76477,0001116 -19-22JUL09-1/1

3-4-10

020113

PN=122


Check Transmission Oil Level


1. Run engine for 3 minutes to warm transmission oil.

Park machine on a level surface. Move transmission control lever (TCL) to NEUTRAL. Engage park brake.

2. With engine running at slow idle, turn handle of transmission dipstick (1) counterclockwise and remove.

NOTE: Normal hot oil can be above full mark.

3. Check oil level on dipstick. If oil is not within operating range, add oil through dipstick tube. See

Transmission, Axles, and Mechanical Front Wheel

Drive (MFWD) Oil. (Section 3-1.)

4. Install transmission dipstick and turn handle clockwise to tighten.

1— Transmission Dipstick



MD04263,0000145 -19-07JUL09-1/1

Grease Backhoe Coupler Fittings—If

Equipped

Apply grease to each lubrication fitting until it escapes from the joint.

1 Point Each Side—Left Side Shown

MD04263,00003A9 -19-22APR09-1/1

3-5-1

020113

PN=123

Maintenance—Initial Service—250 Hours

Change Engine Break-In Oil and Replace

Filter


1. Run engine to warm oil. Park machine on a level surface. Engage park brake. Stop engine.

2. Remove engine oil drain plug (1). Allow oil to drain into a container.

3. Using a suitable filter wrench, turn engine oil filter

(2) counterclockwise and remove from base. Clean mounting surfaces of base as necessary. Dispose of waste oil properly.

4. Apply a thin film of oil to sealing ring on new engine oil filter, and install by turning new filter clockwise by hand until gasket touches mounting surface. Torque an additional 1/2—3/4 turn with filter wrench.

5. Install engine oil drain plug.

6. Remove engine oil fill cap (3) and fill engine with oil to specification. See Diesel Engine Oil. (Section 3-1.)

Specification

Engine Oil—Capacity........................................................................ 13 L

3.5 gal

IMPORTANT: Before starting engine after a filter change, crank engine for 10 seconds without starting to fill new engine oil filter and pre-lubricate the turbocharger, if equipped.

7. Run engine for 2 minutes and then stop engine. Check for leaks around drain plug and filter, and tighten as necessary. Check oil level. See Check Engine Oil

Level. (Section 3-4.)

1— Engine Oil Drain Plug

2— Engine Oil Filter





3-6-1


MD04263,0000146 -19-07JUL09-1/1

020113

PN=124


Check MFWD Planetary Housing Oil—If

Equipped

1. Rotate housing until OIL LEVEL line (B) is horizontal and fill plug (A) is above line as shown.

NOTE: If oil level is low, use HY-GARD™ oil to fill to proper level.

2. Remove plug and check that oil is filled to bottom of plug hole.

3. Add oil to plug hole if necessary. See Transmission,

Axles, and Mechanical Front Wheel Drive (MFWD)

Oil. (Section 3-1.)

4. Install plug.

5. Repeat procedure for opposite side wheel.


A—MFWD Planetary Housing

Oil Fill Plug

B—Oil Level Line

VD76477,000127B -19-09JUL09-1/1

Check MFWD Axle Oil Level—If Equipped

1. Remove plug (1) to check oil level. Oil should be filled to bottom of plug.

NOTE: If oil level is low, use HY-GARD™ oil to fill to proper level.

2. Add oil, as necessary, through plug hole. See



3. Install plug.

1— Plug


VD76477,000127C -19-09JUL09-1/1

3-7-1

020113

PN=125

Maintenance—Every 250 Hours

Check Battery Electrolyte Level and

Terminals

CAUTION: Battery gas can explode. Keep sparks and flames away from batteries. Use a flashlight to check battery electrolyte level.

NEVER check battery charge by placing a metal object across the posts. Use a voltmeter or hydrometer.

ALWAYS remove grounded (-) battery clamp first and replace it last.

Sulfuric acid in battery electrolyte is poisonous. It is strong enough to burn skin, eat holes in clothing, and cause blindness if splashed into eyes.

Avoid the hazard by:

1. Filling batteries in a well-ventilated area.

2. Wearing eye protection and rubber gloves.

3. Avoiding breathing fumes when electrolyte is added.

4. Avoiding spilling or dripping electrolyte.

5. Use proper jump start procedure.

If you spill acid on yourself:

1. Flush your skin with water.

2. Apply baking soda or lime to help neutralize the acid.

3. Flush your eyes with water for 15—30 minutes.

Get medical attention immediately.

If acid is swallowed:

1. Do not induce vomiting.

2. Drink large amounts of water or milk, but do not exceed 1.9 L (2 quarts).

3. Get medical attention immediately.

1. Remove battery box cover.


TX,75,DH1574 -19-28APR93-1/3

3-7-2

020113

PN=126


IMPORTANT: If water is added to batteries during freezing weather, batteries must be charged after water is added to prevent batteries from freezing. Charge battery using a battery charger or by running the engine.

2. Fill each cell to within specified range with distilled water. DO NOT overfill.

CAUTION: Prevent possible injury. ALWAYS remove grounded (—) battery clamp first and replace it last.

3. Disconnect battery clamps, grounded clamp first.

A—Battery Post

B—Fill Tube

C—Electrolyte Level Range

4. Clean battery terminals (A) and clamps with a stiff brush.

5. Apply lubricating grease (B) around battery terminal base only.

6. Install and tighten clamps, grounded clamp last.

TX,75,DH1574 -19-28APR93-2/3

TX,75,DH1574 -19-28APR93-3/3

3-7-3

020113

PN=127


Check Rear Axle Oil Level

NOTE: If the backhoe has been run in high-speed transport, wait 30 minutes for the axle oil level to stabilize before checking oil.

1. Move machine onto level ground.

2. Remove rear axle oil level plug (1). Oil should run out of plug hole if the oil level is correct.

3. If oil level is not correct, add oil as necessary. See



4. Install plug.

1— Rear Axle Oil Level Plug

Take Engine Oil Sample

See your authorized dealer.

VD76477,00014E9 -19-11APR07-1/1

MB60223,00000E5 -19-11MAR09-1/1

3-7-4

020113

PN=128


Check Air Intake Hose

1. Check engine air intake hose (A) for cracks and replace as necessary.

2. Check for loose connections and tighten hose clamps as necessary.

A—Engine Air Intake Hose


Check Boom-to-Dipperstick Pin Bolt Torque

Check torque on the backhoe boom-to-dipperstick pivot pin bolt (A). Torque the cap screw to specification.

Specification

Backhoe Boom-to-

Dipperstick Pivot Pin

Bolt—Torque................................................................................620 N·m

460 lb-ft

A—Backhoe Boom-to-

Dipperstick Pivot Pin Bolt


MD04263,0000147 -19-20FEB09-1/1

CED,OUO1079,443 -19-14DEC06-1/1

3-8-1

020113

PN=129


Drain Fuel Tank Water and Sediment

CAUTION: Handle fuel carefully. If the engine is hot or running, DO NOT drain fuel tank.

DO NOT smoke while draining fuel tank or working on fuel system.

NOTE: To ensure that all of the water drains properly, use the right stabilizer to lift the right rear wheel off of the ground.

NOTE: Dispose of waste properly.

1. Loosen sediment drain plug (1) on front of fuel tank and allow fuel to flow for several seconds.

2. Tighten plug securely to stop fuel flow.

1— Sediment Drain Plug

MD04263,000011D -19-18FEB09-1/1

3-8-2

020113

PN=130


Change Engine Oil and Replace Filter

IMPORTANT: If fuel sulfur content exceeds 0.5 percent, change engine oil at 1/2 the normal interval.

1. Run engine to warm oil. Park machine on a level surface. Engage park brake. Stop engine.

2. Remove engine oil drain plug (1). Allow oil to drain into a container. Dispose of waste oil properly.

3. Using a suitable filter wrench, turn engine oil filter

(2) counterclockwise and remove from base. Clean mounting surfaces of base as necessary.

4. Apply a thin film of oil to sealing ring on new filter, and turn new filter clockwise by hand until gasket touches mounting surface. Torque an additional 1/2—3/4 turn with filter wrench.

5. Install engine oil drain plug.

6. Remove engine oil fill cap (3) and fill engine with oil to specification. See Diesel Engine Oil. (Section 3-1.)

Install cap.

Specification

Engine Oil—Capacity........................................................................ 13 L

3.5 gal

IMPORTANT: Before starting engine after a filter change, crank engine for 10 seconds without starting to fill new engine oil filter and pre-lubricate the turbocharger, if equipped.

7. Run engine for 2 minutes and then stop engine. Check for leaks around drain plug and filter, and tighten as necessary. Check oil level. See Check Engine Oil


1— Engine Oil Drain Plug

2— Engine Oil Filter





3-8-3


MD04263,0000148 -19-23FEB09-1/1

020113

PN=131


Replace Primary and Final Fuel Filters—Tier



1. Thoroughly clean primary and final fuel filters, water separator assembly, and surrounding area.

2. Turn retaining ring (1) counterclockwise and remove primary fuel filter element (2).

3. Disconnect water-in-fuel sensor (9).

4. Turn retaining ring (7) counterclockwise and remove final fuel filter element (8).

5. Remove water separator bowl (3) from primary fuel filter. Drain and clean separator bowl.

6. Install water separator bowl onto new primary fuel filter element. Tighten securely.

NOTE: The fuel filter must be indexed properly and the key on canister must be oriented in slot of mounting base for correct installation.

7. Clean filter base (4) and thoroughly inspect filter base seal ring. Replace as needed.

NOTE: Do not attempt to turn filter element into base.

8. Install new primary and final fuel elements by aligning vertical locators (6) into slots (5) on filter base. Push filter elements up firmly until filter snaps against base.

9. Turn retaining ring clockwise onto filter base until retaining ring clicks tightly into place.

10. Connect water-in-fuel sensor.

11. To prime the fuel system turn the key switch to the ON position and wait 60 seconds.

1— Retaining Ring

2— Primary Fuel Filter Element

3— Water Separator Bowl

4— Filter Base

5— Slots

6— Vertical Locators


8— Final Fuel Filter Element

9— Water-in-Fuel Sensor

10— Bleed Screw

MD04263,0000123 -19-18FEB09-1/1

3-8-4

020113

PN=132


Replace Fuel Filter—Tier 2/Stage II Engine


1. Turn retaining ring (1) counterclockwise and remove filter element (2). Allow sediment to drain into a container.

2. Remove water separator assembly (3) from old filter element. Drain and clean separator assembly. Install assembly on new filter element.

3. Clean filter base (4).

NOTE: Do not attempt to turn filter element into base.

4. Install new fuel element by aligning vertical locators

(5) into slots (6) on filter base. Push filter element up firmly until filter snaps against base.

5. Turn retaining ring clockwise into filter base until retaining ring clicks tightly into place.

6. Loosen bleed screw (7) by turning knob counterclockwise.

7. Operate primer lever (8) until fuel flow from bleed screw is free of air bubbles.

NOTE: If there is no fuel flow, push primer lever toward engine and turn crankshaft using starter motor to reposition camshaft. Repeat step 7.

8. Tighten bleed screw.

9. Push primer lever toward engine as far as possible.

Replace Auxiliary Water Separator Fuel

Filter—If Equipped

1. Place container under drain hose (6).

2. Loosen air vent (2) and drain valve (5). Drain water, fuel, and sediment into container. Dispose of waste properly.

3. Tighten drain valve.

4. Disconnect water-in-fuel (WIF) sensor (7).

5. Remove glass bowl (4).

6. Remove and replace filter element (3).

7. Install glass bowl.

8. Remove trapped air from fuel filter by using air vent and priming hand pump (1).

9. Connect WIF sensor.

10. Start engine and let it run for 1 minute. Check for leaks.

11. If needed, tighten filter element and glass bowl only enough to stop leaks.

1— Priming Hand Pump

2— Air Vent

3— Filter Element

4— Glass Bowl

5— Drain Valve

6— Drain Hose

7— Water-In-Fuel (WIF) Sensor


2— Filter Element

3— Water Separator Assembly

4— Filter Base

5— Slots

6— Vertical Locators


8— Primer Lever

MD04263,0000124 -19-20FEB09-1/1

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

OU90V02,0000160 -19-07JUL09-1/1

3-8-5

020113

PN=133


Clean Engine Crankcase Ventilation

Tube—Tier 2/Stage II Engine

Remove vent tube (A) and clean interior using diesel fuel.

A—Vent Tube


MD04263,0000127 -19-20FEB09-1/1

Clean Engine Crankcase Ventilation

Tube—Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine

Remove vent tube (A) and clean interior using diesel fuel.

A—Vent Tube

Take Fluid Samples

See your authorized dealer for taking the following fluid samples:

•

Hydraulic Oil

•

Transmission Oil

•

Rear Axle Oil

•

Engine Coolant

•

Diesel Fuel


MD04263,0000125 -19-20FEB09-1/1

MD04263,000035C -19-15APR09-1/1

3-8-6

020113

PN=134


Clean, Pack, and Adjust Non-Powered Front Wheel Bearings—If Equipped

3

5

1

2 6

7

8

9

10

4

T158732

1— Seal Ring

2— Bearing Cone

3— Wheel Hub

4— O-Ring

5— Stud

6— Bearing Cone

7— Thrust Washer

1. Raise machine and install jack stands so front wheels are off ground.

8— Cap Screw (3 used)

9— Wheel Hub Cover

CAUTION: Prevent injury from falling components.

Secure wheel hub (3) with a lift strap before removing any components.

2. Remove wheel.

3. Remove wheel hub cover plug (10) and remove wheel hub cover (9) using wedges. Remove and inspect

O-ring (4), replace if necessary.

4. Remove three cap screws (8) and thrust washer (7).

5. Remove wheel bearing (6).

6. Remove and inspect wheel hub (3) with bearing cups.

To replace bearing cups, place wheel hub on flat surface and drive bearing cups out with a hammer and driver.

IMPORTANT: Removing seal ring (1) will destroy it. Do not remove seal ring unless damage is noted.

7. Remove bearing cone (2) using wedges.

10— Wheel Hub Cover Plug

8. Clean all dirt and grease from bearings, spindle and hub assembly.

9. Inspect grease seals for damage or hardened lips and replace as necessary.

10. Pack bearings and coat seal lips with John Deere

Multi-Purpose Grease or equivalent.

11. Install bearing cone (2) on spindle using a hammer and driver.

12. Install wheel hub (3) on spindle.

13. Install bearing cone (6) to hub and spindle.

14. Apply TY9371 LOCTITE® to cap screws (8). Position thrust washer (7) on spindle in hub and install cap screws (8). Torque cap screws to specification.

Specification

Thrust Plate Cap

Screws—Torque..........................................................................120 N·m

89 lb-ft

15. Grease and install O-ring (4) on wheel hub cover (9).

Drive wheel hub cover into wheel hub.


3-9-1

MD04263,0000353 -19-03APR09-1/2

020113

PN=135


16. Install hub cover plug (10) and tighten to specification.

Specification

Wheel Hub Cover

Plug—Torque.................................................................................15 N·m

133 lb-in

LOCTITE is a trademark of Loctite Corp.

17. Install wheel and repeat process for other side.

MD04263,0000353 -19-03APR09-2/2

Replace Hydraulic Reservoir Breather

1. Open engine hood. Remove cap screws (A) and move loader mast cover (B) aside. Take care not to damage hose attached to bottom of windshield washer nozzle

(C).

2. Remove hydraulic reservoir breather (D).

NOTE: Avoid dripping hydraulic oil. Do not reroute hydraulic reservoir breather hoses.

3. Install new hydraulic reservoir breather with arrow pointing toward reservoir.

4. Install loader mast cover and cap screws. Close engine hood.

A—Cap Screw (4 used)

B—Loader Mast Cover

C—Windshield Washer Nozzle

D—Hydraulic Reservoir

Breather

CED,OUO1079,582 -19-25AUG00-1/1

3-9-2

020113

PN=136


Replace Engine Air Cleaner Elements—Tier


Inspect elements when air filter restriction indicator lights.

1. Open hood.

2. Unfasten clips (1) and remove air cleaner cover.

3. Slide primary element (2) and secondary element (3) out to remove.

4. Clean inside of air cleaner and outlet tube.

5. Install new secondary element and primary element.

Ensure that each element is properly centered and seated.


6. Install air cleaner cover. Fasten clips.




MD04263,0000128 -19-09JUL09-1/1

3-9-3

020113

PN=137


Replace Engine Air Cleaner Elements—Tier

2/Stage II Engine

Inspect elements when air filter restriction indicator lights.

1. Open hood.

2. Unfasten clips (A) and remove air cleaner cover.

3. Slide primary element (B) and secondary element (C) out to remove.

4. Clean inside of air cleaner and outlet tube.

5. Install new secondary element and primary element.

Ensure that each element is properly centered and seated.


6. Install air cleaner cover with dust unloader valve pointed down. Fasten clips.

A—Clip (3 used)

B—Primary Element

C—Secondary Element

MD04263,0000129 -19-09JUL09-1/1

Replace Cab Air Filters

Cab Fresh Air Filter

1. Open latch (A) on inside of right-side window frame.

2. Remove fresh air filter cover (B) and fresh air filter.

3. Install new filter and filter cover.

4. Close latch.

A—Latch B—Fresh Air Filter Cover


3-9-4

MB60223,00000EB -19-22APR09-1/2

020113

PN=138


Cab Recirculating Air Filter

1. Remove cab recirculating air filter cover (C) and cab recirculating air filter.

2. Install new filter and filter cover.

C—Cab Recirculating Air Filter

Cover

Inspect Belt

Inspect serpentine belt (A) for wear and damage. See your authorized dealer for replacement.

A—Serpentine Belt

MB60223,00000EB -19-22APR09-2/2

3-9-5

MD04263,0000120 -19-18FEB09-1/1

020113

PN=139


Replace Hydraulic Oil Filter

1. Turn hydraulic oil filter (A) counterclockwise and remove.

2. Apply film of oil to sealing ring on new hydraulic oil filter and install. Turn hydraulic oil filter clockwise until sealing ring touches mounting surface, then tighten an additional 3/4-to-one turn with a suitable filter wrench.

3. Check hydraulic oil level.

4. Start engine and run for 2 minutes to allow hydraulic oil filter to fill with oil and to purge air from charge circuit.

5. Stop engine and check hydraulic oil level. See Check

Hydraulic Reservoir Oil Level. (Section 3-4.)

6. Check for leakage around hydraulic filter. Tighten just enough to stop leaks, if necessary.

A—Hydraulic Oil Filter

Hydraulic Oil Filter

VD76477,000131A -19-01NOV10-1/1

Replace Fuel Breather


2. Pull fuel breather (1) off hose.

3. Install new fuel breather with arrow on breather pointing toward hose.


1— Fuel Breather


3-9-6


MD04263,0000138 -19-21APR09-1/1

020113

PN=140


Change Transmission Oil and Replace Filter

NOTE: Only approximately 8.0—8.5 L of oil will drain.

It is intended that the remainder of oil will remain in the cooler and torque converter.

1. Remove transmission drain plug (1) from bottom of transmission and drain oil into suitable container.

Dispose of waste properly.

Specification

Powershift Transmission

Oil—Capacity.................................................................................... 15 L

4.0 gal

2. Install drain plug.

3. Turn transmission filter (2) counterclockwise and remove.

4. Apply film of oil to sealing ring on new transmission oil filter and install. Turn filter clockwise until sealing ring touches mounting surface, then tighten an additional

3/4-to-one turn with a suitable filter wrench.

5. Turn handle of transmission dipstick (3) counterclockwise and remove. Fill transmission with oil through dipstick tube. See Transmission, Axles, and Mechanical Front Wheel Drive (MFWD) Oil.

(Section 3-1.)

6. Start engine and run for 3 minutes to purge air from charge circuit.

7.

With engine running at slow idle, remove transmission dipstick. Check transmission oil level and add oil through dipstick tube as necessary. See Transmission,

Axles, and Mechanical Front Wheel Drive (MFWD)

Oil. (Section 3-1.)

8. Install transmission dipstick and turn handle clockwise to tighten.

1— Transmission Drain Plug

2— Transmission Filter

3— Transmission Dipstick


3-9-7


VD76477,00010F0 -19-29MAY09-1/1

020113

PN=141


Check Coolant

See Check Coolant in Maintenance—As Required.

(Section 3-3.)

MD04263,0000170 -19-14SEP09-1/1

3-9-8

020113

PN=142


Adjust Engine Valve Lash (Clearance)


Change Hydraulic Reservoir Oil

1. Park machine on a level surface.

2. Move backhoe and stabilizers to transport position and lower loader bucket to ground. Stop engine.

3. Remove hydraulic reservoir fill cap (B).

4. Remove cap screw (C) and bracket (D). Route drain hose (E) into a suitable container.

5. Remove cap (F) from end of drain hose and drain oil.

Allow adequate time for oil to drain. Dispose of waste oil properly.

Specification

Hydraulic Reservoir

Oil—Capacity.................................................................................... 39 L

10.3 gal

6. Replace hydraulic oil filter. See Replace Hydraulic Oil

Filter. (Section 3-9.)

7. Install cap on drain hose.

8. Route drain hose for storage. Install bracket and cap screw.

9. Refill hydraulic reservoir. See Transmission, Axles, and Mechanical Front Wheel Drive (MFWD) Oil.

(Section 3-1.)

10. Check oil level.

11. Install hydraulic reservoir fill cap.

B—Hydraulic Reservoir Fill Cap

C—Cap Screw

D—Bracket

E—Drain Hose

F— Cap

TX03679,00017DD -19-08MAY01-1/1



MB60223,0000010 -19-10MAR09-1/1

3-10-1

020113

PN=143


Change MFWD Planetary Housing Oil—If

Equipped

1. Rotate wheel so drain plug (A) is at its lowest point, remove plug and drain oil. Dispose of waste oil properly.

Specification

MFWD Front Wheel

Planetary Housing

Oil—Capacity...................................................................................... 1 L

1 qt


3. Rotate wheel so plug (A) is above OIL LEVEL line (B) when line is horizontal.

4. Add oil to bottom of fill plug hole and install plug. See



A—Plug B—Oil Level Line

MB60223,00000E3 -19-10MAR09-1/1

Change MFWD Front Axle Housing Oil—If

Equipped

NOTE: Dispose of drain oil properly.

MFWD axle housing is filled with HY-GARD™ gear oil at the factory. Fill MFWD axle housing with HY-GARD oil to fill to proper level.

1. Remove drain plug (1) to drain oil. Dispose of waste oil properly.

Specification

MFWD Front Axle

Housing Oil—Capacity..................................................................... 6.5 L

1.7 gal


3. Remove fill plug (2) and add oil so it is level with bottom of fill plug hole. See Transmission, Axles, and

Mechanical Front Wheel Drive (MFWD) Oil. (Section

3-1.)


1— Drain Plug

4.

Install fill plug.

2— Fill Plug

VD76477,0001280 -19-09JUL09-1/1

3-10-2

020113

PN=144


Change Rear Axle and Planetary Housing Oil

NOTE: Dispose of waste oil properly.

1. Drain rear axle and both planetary housings oil into a container using drain plugs (1 and 2). Install plugs.

Specification

Rear Axle and Planetary

Housing Oil—Capacity...................................................................... 18 L

4.8 gal

2. Rotate wheel so plug (2) is above OIL LEVEL line (3) when line is horizontal as shown.

3. Remove rear axle check and fill plug (4) and fill with oil until level with bottom of fill plug hole. See Check

Rear Axle Oil Level. (Section 3-7.)

NOTE: It will take approximately 5 minutes for oil to settle into outer housing when oil is warm.

4. Wait 5-10 minutes for oil to settle, then check level again and add oil as necessary. If oil is cold, settle time may increase.

5. Install all plugs.

1— Rear Axle Drain Plug

2— Planetary Housing Drain and Fill Plug

3— Planetary Housing Oil Level

Line

4— Rear Axle Check and Fill

Plug

Rear Axle Drain and Fill Plugs

Planetary Drain and Fill Plug

VD76477,000113F -19-01NOV10-1/1

3-10-3

020113

PN=145


Inspect and Clean Hydraulic Reservoir Fill

Screen

1. Remove hydraulic reservoir fill cap (1) from fill tube.

2. Remove retaining clip and hydraulic reservoir fill screen from fill tube.

3. Inspect hydraulic reservoir fill screen and clean as necessary.

4. Install hydraulic reservoir fill screen and retaining clip in fill tube.

5. Install hydraulic reservoir fill cap in fill tube.

1— Hydraulic Reservoir Fill Cap



MD04263,000011C -19-20FEB09-1/1

3-10-4

020113

PN=146


Draining the Cooling System—Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine


Shut off engine. Remove filler cap only when cool enough to touch with bare hands.

Slowly loosen cap to relieve pressure before removing completely.

NOTE: Drain and flush cooling system every 6000 hours using clean water, and refill with new coolant.

Specification

Cooling System—Tier

3/Stage IIIA


6.6 gal

1. Open air bleed plug (3) on thermal bypass valve assembly until cross drill in plug is visible.

2. Open valve (4) on bottom of radiator 3 turns.

3. Connect a hose to radiator drain valve (1) on radiator.

4. Turn radiator drain valve counterclockwise to open valve. Allow coolant to drain into a container. Dispose of waste properly.

5. Connect a hose to engine block coolant drain valve (2).

6. Turn engine block coolant drain valve counterclockwise to open valve. Allow coolant to drain into a container.


7. Turn both drain valves clockwise to close valves and remove hoses.

8. Close the air bleed plug and valve on bottom of radiator.

1— Radiator Drain Valve

2— Engine Block Coolant Drain

Valve

3— Air Bleed Plug

4— Valve

3-11-1

MD04263,0000175 -19-22APR09-1/1

020113

PN=147


Draining the Cooling System—Tier 2/Stage II Engine


Shut off engine. Remove filler cap only when cool enough to touch with bare hands.

Slowly loosen cap to relieve pressure before removing completely.

NOTE: Drain and flush cooling system every 6000 hours using clean water, and refill with new coolant.

Specification


2/Stage II


5.5 gal



3. Connect a hose to radiator drain valve (1) on radiator.

4. Turn radiator drain valve counterclockwise to open valve. Allow coolant to drain into a container. Dispose of waste properly.

5. Connect a hose to engine block coolant drain valve (2).

6. Turn engine block coolant drain valve counterclockwise to open valve. Allow coolant to drain into a container.


7. Turn both drain valves clockwise to close valves and remove hoses.

8. Close the air bleed plug and valve on bottom of radiator.

1— Radiator Drain Valve

2— Engine Block Coolant Drain

Valve


4— Valve


3-11-2

MD04263,0000176 -19-22APR09-1/1

020113

PN=148


Filling the Cooling System—Tier 3/Stage IIIA

Engine

CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from hot spraying fluid. DO NOT remove surge tank cap unless the engine is cool. Release all pressure before removing cap.

Specification


3/Stage IIIA


6.6 gal



3. Remove surge tank cap (5). Fill tank until coolant stays between MIN COLD and MAX COLD marks.

4. Close valve and air bleed plug.

5. Run tractor at 1200 rpm for 2 minutes and top off coolant.

6. Close surge tank cap.

IMPORTANT: Use only permanent-type low silicate, ethylene glycol base antifreeze in coolant solution. Other types of antifreeze may damage cylinder seals.

NOTE: All machines are shipped from the factory with a 50-50 mixture for protection to —34°C

(—30°F). Adjust mixture accordingly to provide freeze protection for your machine.

FREEZING TEMPERATURES: Fill with permanent-type low silicate, ethylene glycol antifreeze (without stop-leak additive) and clean, soft water. Add TY26603 coolant extender as required per COOL-GARD™ II test strips.


4— Valve



3-11-3

MD04263,0000177 -19-07JUL09-1/1

020113

PN=149


Filling the Cooling System—Tier 2/Stage II

Engine

CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from hot spraying fluid. DO NOT remove surge tank cap unless the engine is cool. Release all pressure before removing cap.

Specification


2/Stage II


5.5 gal



3. Remove surge tank cap (5). Fill tank until coolant stays between MIN COLD and MAX COLD marks.

4. Close valve and air bleed plug.

5. Run tractor at 1200 rpm for 2 minutes and top off coolant.

6. Close surge tank cap.

IMPORTANT: Use only permanent-type low silicate, ethylene glycol base antifreeze in coolant solution. Other types of antifreeze may damage cylinder seals.

NOTE: All machines are shipped from the factory with a 50-50 mixture for protection to —34°C

(—30°F). Adjust mixture accordingly to provide freeze protection for your machine.

FREEZING TEMPERATURES: Fill with permanent-type low silicate, ethylene glycol antifreeze (without stop-leak additive) and clean, soft water. Add TY26603 coolant extender as required per COOL-GARD™ II test strips.


4— Valve



MD04263,0000178 -19-09JUL09-1/1

3-11-4

020113

PN=150

Miscellaneous—Machine

External Service Brake Inspection

Do first inspection at 5000 hours followed by 1000 hour inspection intervals after the first 5000 hour inspection.

If the service brakes are subjected to severe duty, inspect more frequently.

1. Inspect brakes for wear through the external inspection ports (1 and 2).

2. Remove axle housing and replace brake disc if oil grooves (3) on facing material are no longer visible.

1— Right Rear Wheel External

Inspection Port

2— Left Rear Wheel External

Inspection Port

3— Oil Groove

Right Rear Wheel External Inspection Port

3

Left Rear Wheel External Inspection Port

4-1-1

Oil Groove

VD76477,0001222 -19-05NOV10-1/1

020113

PN=151

Miscellaneous—Machine

Check and Adjust Backhoe Boom Lock

Checking Boom Lock Operation

1. Operate the boom lock lever repeatedly to verify proper operation.

2. If boom lock is out of adjustment, adjust per procedure.

Adjusting the Boom Lock

IMPORTANT: To avoid damage to lock system, adjust lock so it is able to pass through full range of motion. Lock must completely clear boom hook (1) when boom lock lever is pulled, and go down to stop (2) when lever is released with boom moved away from latch area.

Right Side Shown

Perform the following adjustment for both the left and right boom locks:

NOTE: Boom lock is not shim adjustable.

1— Boom Hook (2 used)

2— Stop (4 used)

3— Pin (2 used)

4— Yoke (2 used)

5— Jam Nut (2 used)

1. Start machine and lower stabilizers.

2. Move boom in slightly towards machine to relieve tension on boom lock.

3. Pull in on boom lock lever. While moving boom away from machine, verify boom locks completely clear boom hooks (1).

4. Once boom is away from latch area, verify locks contact stops (2) on both sides of machine when boom lock lever is released.

5. Move boom back into transport position. Stop the engine.

6. Remove pin (3) and spring from boom lock.

7. Adjust position of yoke (4) so when the boom lock control lever is at rest, yoke is aligned with pin mounting hole.

8. Tighten jam nut (5) to hold yoke in adjusted position.

9. Install pin.

10. Repeat yoke adjust procedure on opposite side of machine.

11. Check boom lock operation per procedure to verify proper operation.

MD04263,000034E -19-03APR09-1/1

4-1-2

020113

PN=152


Inspecting and Cleaning Dusty Secondary and Primary Element


Install new elements:

•

If the element shows damage and needs to be replaced.

•

If element is visibly dirty and will not clean.

•

After 1000 hours service or annually.


1. Tap element with the palm of your hand, NOT ON A

HARD SURFACE.

CAUTION: Reduce compressed air to less than

210 kPa (2.1 bar) (30 psi) when using for cleaning purposes. Clear area of bystanders, guard against flying chips, and wear personal protection equipment including eye protection.

2. If this does not remove dust, use compressed air under 210 kPa (2.1 bar) (30 psi).


3. Direct air up and down the pleats from inside to outside. Be careful not to make a break in the element.

TX03679,00017E3 -19-08FEB07-1/1

Check Receiver-Dryer—If Equipped

IMPORTANT: Prevent possible compressor damage.

If moisture sight glass color indicates wet

(pink), dryer is saturated and should be changed within the next 100 machine hours to prevent further buildup of moisture in refrigerant.

1. Open hood.

2. Check color in moisture sight glass (A). Color should be blue, indicating that refrigerant is dry.

3. Check air bubble sight glass (B) for air bubbles. No air bubbles, or few air bubbles, should be visible.

4. If moisture sight glass shows wet (pink), or if excessive air bubbles are visible, see your authorized dealer within the next 100 machine hours to service the receiver-dryer.

A—Moisture Sight Glass B—Air Bubble Sight Glass

HG31779,00000BF -19-26JUL02-1/1

4-1-3

020113

PN=153


Checking Coolant Hoses and Radiator

Check upper radiator hose (1) and lower radiator hose (2) for cracks and leaks. Tighten hose clamps at each end of hoses as necessary.

Check radiator for dirt, damage, leaks, and loose or broken mountings. Clean radiator fins.

1— Upper Radiator Hose 2— Lower Radiator Hose




4-1-4


MD04263,0000149 -19-20FEB09-1/1

020113

PN=154


Do Not Service or Adjust Injection Nozzles or Injection Pump

If injection nozzles are not working correctly or are dirty, the engine will not run normally. See your authorized dealer for service.

Changing the injection pump in any way not approved by the manufacturer will end the warranty. See your copy of the John Deere warranty on this machine.

Do not service an injection pump that is not operating correctly. See your authorized injection pump service center.

TX,90,FF3116 -19-03NOV08-1/1

Precautions for Alternator and Regulator

When batteries are connected, follow these rules:

1. Disconnect negative (—) battery cable when you work on or near alternator or regulator.

2. DO NOT TRY TO POLARIZE ALTERNATOR OR

REGULATOR.

3. Ensure alternator wires are correctly connected

BEFORE you connect batteries.

4. Do not ground alternator output terminal.

5. Do not disconnect or connect any alternator or regulator wires while batteries are connected or while alternator is operating.

6. Connect batteries or a booster battery in the correct polarity (positive [+] to positive [+] and negative [—] to negative [—]).

7. Do not disconnect the batteries when engine is running and alternator is charging.

8. Disconnect battery cables before you connect battery charger to the batteries.

T82,EXMA,I -19-16JAN08-1/1

4-1-5

020113

PN=155


Using Battery Charger

CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from exploding battery. Do not charge a battery if the battery is frozen or it may explode. Warm battery to

16°C (60°F) before charging.

Turn off charger before connecting or disconnecting it.

IMPORTANT: Do not use battery charger as a booster if a battery has a 1.150 specific gravity reading or lower.

Disconnect battery ground (-) clamp before you charge batteries in the machine to prevent damage to electrical components.

A battery charger may be used as a booster to start engine.

Ventilate the area where batteries are being charged.

Stop or cut back charging rate if battery case feels hot, or is venting electrolyte. Battery temperature must not exceed 52°C (125°F).

Prevent Battery Explosions

Charger

OUT4001,0000239 -19-03JAN12-1/1

Using Booster Batteries—12-Volt System

Before boost starting, machine must be properly shut down to prevent unexpected machine movement when engine starts.

CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from exploding battery. An explosive gas is produced while batteries are in use or being charged. Keep flames or sparks away from the battery area. Make sure the batteries are charged in a well ventilated area.

IMPORTANT: The machine electrical system is a 12-volt negative (-) ground. Use only

12-volt booster batteries.

1. Connect one end of the positive cable to the positive terminal of the machine batteries and the other end to the positive terminal of the booster batteries.

2. Connect one end of the negative cable to the negative terminal of the booster batteries. Connect other end of the negative cable to the machine as far away from the machine batteries as possible.

3. Start engine.

4. Immediately after starting engine disconnect end of the negative cable from the machine. Then disconnect the other end of the negative cable from the negative terminal of the booster batteries.

5. Disconnect positive cable from booster batteries and machine batteries.

OUT4001,00000E1 -19-02JUL09-1/1

4-1-6

020113

PN=156


Handling, Checking and Servicing Batteries

Carefully

CAUTION: Battery gas can explode. Keep sparks and flames away from batteries. Use a flashlight to check battery electrolyte level.

Never check battery charge by placing a metal object across the posts. Use a voltmeter or hydrometer.

Always remove grounded (-) battery clamp first and replace it last.

Sulfuric acid in battery electrolyte is poisonous. It is strong enough to burn skin, eat holes in clothing, and cause blindness if splashed into eyes.

Avoid the hazard by:

1. Filling batteries in a well-ventilated area.

2. Wearing eye protection and rubber gloves.

3. Avoiding breathing fumes when electrolyte is added.

4. Avoiding spilling or dripping electrolyte.

5. Use proper jump start procedure.

If you spill acid on yourself:

1. Flush your skin with water.

2. Apply baking soda or lime to help neutralize the acid.

3. Flush your eyes with water for 15—30 minutes.

Get medical attention immediately.

If acid is swallowed:

1. Do not induce vomiting.

2. Drink large amounts of water or milk, but do not exceed 1.9 L (2 qt).

3. Get medical attention immediately.

WARNING:

Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm.

Wash hands after handling.

If electrolyte spills on the floor, use one of the following mixtures to neutralize the acid: 0.5 kg (1 lb) baking soda in 4 L (1 gal) water, or 0.47 L (1 pt) household ammonia in

4 L (1 gal) water.

IMPORTANT: Do not overfill the battery cells.

Check the specific gravity of electrolyte in each battery cell.


TX03679,0001788 -19-29APR11-1/2

4-1-7

020113

PN=157


See your authorized dealer for JT05460

SERVICEGARD™ battery and coolant tester. Follow directions included with the tester.

A fully charged battery will have a corrected specific gravity reading of 1.260. If the reading is below 1.200, charge the battery.

SERVICEGARD is a trademark of Deere & Company

Replacing Batteries

Your machine may be equipped with one or two 12-volt hybrid batteries with (—) negative ground. Use only batteries meeting following specifications:

Cold Cranking Amps

Volts

12

BCI Group -18°C (0°F)

31 750

-29°C

(-20°F)

600

Reserve

Capacity

(minutes at

25 amps)

150

Battery And Coolant Tester

TX03679,0001788 -19-29APR11-2/2

TX,90,BG212 -19-07JUL09-1/1

4-1-8

020113

PN=158


Removing Batteries

NOTE: Check for worn or frayed wires and loose or corroded connections.

NOTE: The toolbox must be removed to access the battery box. Always empty the toolbox before lifting it.

1. Remove cap screws (A) and lift toolbox out of battery box.

2. Disconnect negative (—) battery cables first, then positive (+) cables.

3. Remove nuts, washers, and hold-down brackets (B).

4. Lift batteries out of battery box.

A—Cap Screw (3 used) B—Hold-Down Bracket (1 or 2 used)

Optional Dual-Battery Configuration Shown

HG31779,00000BD -19-07JUL09-1/1

JDLink™ Machine Monitoring System

(MMS)—If Equipped

JDLink™ is an equipment monitoring and information delivery system. JDLink™ automatically collects and manages information about where and how construction

JDLink is a trademark of Deere & Company

and forestry equipment is being used, as well as critical machine health data and service status.

For more information, see your authorized dealer or visit www.deere.com (browse to Construction, Services and

Support, JDLink™).

VD76477,0001541 -19-20JUL12-1/1

Replacing Fuses

The fuse block is located to the right of the operator's seat below the loader control lever.


4-1-9

MD04263,000014C -19-10DEC10-1/5

020113

PN=159

B


A

F12

F13

F10

F11

A

F15

K6

K9

K2

F30

F35

F31

F36

A

A

F48

F44

F40

F41

F42

F45

F46

F47

TX1035704

A—Spare

B—Diagnostic Connector

F10— Key Switch Fuse

F11— Radio—Power Port Fuse

(unswitched)

F12— Horn-Stop Lamp Fuse

F13— Flex Load Controller

(FLC)-Flex Hydraulic

Controller (FHC)-Flasher

Fuse (unswitched)

Fuse Panel—Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine

F15— Monitor-Service

ADVISOR™ Fuse

F30— Monitor-Flex Load

Controller (FLC)-Flex

Hydraulic Controller (FHC)

(Sswitched) Fuse

F31— Air Seat-Start Aid Fuse

F35— Park Brake-Pump-MFWD

Fuse

F36— Transmission Control Fuse

F40— Docking-Front Work Lights

Fuse

F41— Front Drive-Tail-Beacon

Lights Fuse

F42— Rear Work Lights Fuse

F44— Blower Fuse

F45— Dome-Radio-Power Port

Fuse

F46— RTD-ALT-Excitation Fuse

F47— Aux Function Power

Connectors Fuse

F48— Wipers-Washer Fuse

K2— Ignition Relay

K6— Transmission Relay

K9— Fuel Pump Lift Relay

Service ADVISOR is a trademark of Deere & Company


MD04263,000014C -19-10DEC10-2/5

4-1-10

020113

PN=160

B


A

F12

F13

F10

F11

A

F15

K6

A

K2

F30

F35

F31

F36

A

A

F48

F44

F40

F41

F42

F45

F46

F47

TX1014514

A—Spare

B—Diagnostic Connector

F10— Key Switch Fuse

F11— Radio—Power Port Fuse

(Unswitched)

F12— Horn-Stop Lamp Fuse

F13— Flex Load Controller

(FLC)-Flex Hydraulic

Controller (FHC)-Flasher

Fuse (Unswitched)

Fuse Panel—Tier 2/Stage II Engine

F15— Monitor-Service

ADVISOR™ Fuse

F30— Monitor-Flex Load

Controller (FLC)-Flex

Hydraulic Controller (FHC)

(Switched) Fuse

F31— Air Seat-Start Aid Fuse

F35— Park Brake-Pump-MFWD

Fuse

F36— Transmission Control Fuse

F40— Docking-Front Work Lights

Fuse

F41— Front Drive-Tail-Beacon

Lights Fuse

F42— Rear Work Lights Fuse

F44— Blower Fuse

F45— Dome-Radio-Power Port

Fuse

F46— RTD-ALT-Excitation Fuse

F47— Aux Function Power

Connectors-Water In Fuel

(WIF) (If Equipped) Fuse

F48— Wipers-Washer Fuse

K2— Ignition Relay

K6— Transmission Relay

Service ADVISOR is a trademark of Deere & Company


MD04263,000014C -19-10DEC10-3/5

4-1-11

020113

PN=161


F50— JDLink ™ Unswitched

Power 7.5A Fuse

F51— JDLink ™ Switched

Power 3A Fuse

F52— JDLink ™ Ground 7.5A

Fuse

F53— JDLink ™ Alternator Run

Signal 3A Fuse

JDLink is a trademark of Deere & Company

F51 F52

F50

F53


JDLink™ Fuse Locations—If Equipped

MD04263,000014C -19-10DEC10-4/5

4-1-12

020113

PN=162


Engine Control Unit (ECU) Fuse

NOTE: The ECU fuse on Tier 3/Stage IIIA engines is a

20A fuse. On Tier 2/Stage II engines it is a 10A fuse.

ECU fuse (1) is located on the left-hand side of engine.

1— Engine Control Unit (ECU)

Fuse



MD04263,000014C -19-10DEC10-5/5

Remove and Install Halogen Bulb

1. Remove screws (1), cover (2), lamp (3), and lamp housing (5).

2. Disconnect wiring lead and release retainer clip to remove bulb (4).

IMPORTANT: Do not touch the halogen bulb with bare hands. Oil and moisture may cause premature bulb failure. Clean bulb glass if touched, using an oil-free cloth with alcohol.

3. Install new bulb, lamp and assemble housing.

1— Screw (4 used)

2— Lamp Cover

3— Lamp

4— Bulb

5— Lamp Housing

Lamp (exploded view)

VD76477,00010D3 -19-05NOV10-1/1

4-1-13

020113

PN=163


Checking Starting System

CAUTION: Avoid possible injury or death. DO

NOT attempt to start machine unless you are sitting in operator’s seat. DO NOT bypass or disable any of the starting system parts.

Set park brake before attempting to start engine.


2. Operator's seat facing forward (loader position) and locked.

3. Move transmission control lever (TCL) to 1st gear forward (1F).

4. Apply service brakes.

5. Start the engine.

NOTE: The engine

will

start with the TCL in forward, F, or reverse, R, but the controller will automatically shift the transmission to neutral (N).

1— Transmission control lever

(TCL)

6. Display will show Release Park Brake. Display will not show F, forward, or R, reverse, until TCL is cycled back to neutral and park brake is released.

VD76477,0001146 -19-13JUL09-1/1

Fluid Sampling Test Ports—If Equipped

Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine

1— Hydraulic Oil Sample Port

2— Engine Oil Sample Port

3— Transmission Oil Sample

Port

4— Coolant Sample Port

Located Under Cab Door


Right Side of Engine

MD04263,000014D -19-20FEB09-1/2

4-1-14

020113

PN=164


Tier 2/Stage II Engine

The fluid sampling ports are located on the right side of the engine.

1— Hydraulic Oil Sample Port

2— Engine Oil Sample Port

3— Transmission Oil Sample

Port

4— Coolant Sample Port

MD04263,000014D -19-20FEB09-2/2

Changing Loader Buckets

CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from falling hardware. Bucket cylinder and links will fall forward if bucket is in dig position when pins are removed. Remove pins only when bucket is on ground in full dump position.

1. Position bucket as shown.

2. Attach a hoist to cylinder (5).

3. Remove pin (1) and rotate pivot links (2) to rear against cross tube (3).

4. Remove pin (4) and carefully lay cylinder on cross tube.

5. Tie pivot links to the cross tube.

CAUTION: Bucket is heavy and can cause injury if not moved properly. Use adequate lifting device to move bucket.

6. Remove retaining hardware, pins (6) and bucket.

7. Position new bucket in dump position. Install pins (6).

8. Untie pivot links from cross tube. Remove hoist from cylinder.

9. Connect pivot links and cylinder using previously removed pins (1 and 4) and retaining hardware.

1— Pin

2— Pivot Link (2 used)

3— Cross Tube

4— Pin

5— Cylinder

6— Pin (2 used)

VD76477,000129C -19-07JUL09-1/1

4-1-15

020113

PN=165


Adding Front Counterweights

CAUTION: Counterweights are heavy and can cause serious injury if dropped. Ensure counterweights are properly supported with a forklift or other adequate lifting device before removing.

Install front counterweights for added stability as necessary.

1. Support counterweights with a forklift before adding or removing weights. Insert forklift tines in slots (1).

2. Remove cap screws (2).

3. Remove or add counterweight (3) as necessary.

4. Install cap screws.

1— Slot (2 used)


Reversing Stabilizer Feet

Use rubber pad side (A) of stabilizer foot when operating on paved surface to prevent damaging work area.

Use cleat side (B) of stabilizer foot when operating in dirt to prevent slipping.

To change foot surface, remove pin (C), rotate foot 180° to opposite surface, and install pin to keep foot from turning back around.

A—Rubber Pad Side

B—Cleat Side

C—Pin

3— Counterweight

VD76477,00012A1 -19-09JUL09-1/1

4-1-16

VD76477,00010D4 -19-16OCT06-1/1

020113

PN=166


Adding Liquid Ballast to Front Tires

See Tire Inflation Pressures. (Section 3-3.)

Weights given are for front tires 75 percent full of water or a 1.6 kg (3.5 lb) per liter (gallon) of water calcium chloride

(CaCl

2

) solution.

Water Only

Tire Size

11L-15

11L-16

12-16.5

12.5/80-18

14.5/75-16.1

15-19.5

16.5L-16.1

Volume

53 L

14 gal

57 L

15 gal

57 L

15 gal

83 L

22 gal

102 L

27 gal

109 L

29 gal

156 L

41 gal

Weight

53 kg

117 lb

57 kg

126 lb

57 kg

126 lb

83 kg

183 lb

102 kg

225 lb

109 kg

240 lb

156 kg

344 lb

NOTE: Approximately 1.6 kg (3.5 lb) CaCl

2 per liter

(gallon) of water will stay slush free to —24°C

(—12°F) and will freeze solid at —47°C (—52°F).

Volume

45 L

12 gal

49 L

13 gal

49 L

13 gal

64 L

17 gal

87 L

23 gal

95 L

25 gal

133 L

35 gal

Water/CaCl

2

Solution

Weight

19 kg

42 lb

21 kg

46 lb

21 kg

46 lb

38 kg

84 lb

37 kg

82 lb

39 kg

86 lb

55 kg

121 lb

Total Weight Per

Tire

64 kg

141 lb

70 kg

154 lb

70 kg

154 lb

102 kg

225 lb

124 kg

273 lb

134 kg

295 lb

188 kg

414 lb

TX18203,00004BC -19-19JUN09-1/1

Welding On Machine

UPDATE IN PROGRESS-7-23-09. SEE OM LEAD FOR

CORRECT CONTENT.

Keep this story and Welding Near Electronic Control Units story next to each other when applicable.

VD76477,00004EC -19-23JUL09-1/1

4-1-17

020113

PN=167


Checking Ride Control Accumulator—If

Equipped

CAUTION: Escaping fluid under pressure can penetrate the skin causing serious injury.

Avoid the hazard by relieving pressure before disconnecting hydraulic or other lines. Tighten all connections before applying pressure. Search for leaks with a piece of cardboard. Protect hands and body from high pressure fluids.

CAUTION: Clear area of bystanders. The boom will jump upward during this check. Make sure area around bucket is clear.

1. Start engine.

2. Run engine at high idle.

3. Push ride control switch (1) to on position.

4. Raise boom to maximum height.

5. Power boom down half-way to ground.

6. Stop suddenly by releasing loader control lever.

7. If boom is not cushioned when loader valve is released, see your authorized dealer for servicing the accumulator.

1— Ride Control Switch

VD76477,0001137 -19-09JUL09-1/1

4-1-18

020113

PN=168


Discharge Ride Control System Hydraulic

Pressure—If Equipped

CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from unexpected boom or bucket movement when equipped with ride control. Ride control accumulator energy must be discharged when working on hydraulic components. Turn key switch to ON. Push upper half of ride control switch to activate ride control and move loader control lever to FLOAT.

Do not have ride control activated when starting the machine; the machine may move if ride control is activated when the machine is started.

Do not have ride control activated when operating the loader; the ride control system may cause unexpected movement.

The ride control system has an accumulator and valve in the loader circuit.

Before servicing or performing maintenance on the machine, discharge hydraulic oil pressure from the ride control system as follows:

1. Ensure that area around bucket is clear.

2. Push lower half of ride control switch (1) to deactivate ride control.

3. Start the engine.

1— Ride Control Switch

4. Position front loader boom so that the bucket is approximately 30 cm (1 ft) off the ground.

5. Stop the engine.

6. Turn key switch to ON without restarting engine. Push upper half of ride control switch to activate ride control.

7. Move loader control lever to float position. Bucket should lower to ground.

8. If ride control accumulator has lost gas charge, see

Checking Ride Control Accumulator—If Equipped in this section.

VD76477,0001138 -19-07JUL09-1/1

Discharge Pilot Control System Hydraulic

Pressure—If Equipped

CAUTION: Prevent injury from unexpected machine movement. Turn engine off. Keep bystanders clear of machine.

Before servicing or performing maintenance on the machine, discharge hydraulic oil pressure from the pilot control system as follows:

1. Ensure that area around bucket is clear.

2. Turn off engine.

3. Turn key switch to “ON” position.

4. Rotate seat to backhoe operation position.

5. Pull pilot control towers back to operating position.

6. Push pilot control enable/disable switch (1) to “Unlock” position to enable pilot controls.

1— Pilot Control Enable/Disable Switch

2— Pilot Controls

7. Actuate pilot controls (2) in a circular pattern for five to ten rotations.

HG31779,00001BD -19-07JUL09-1/1

4-1-19

020113

PN=169


Lowering Boom Without Electrical

Power—For Machines With Pilot Controls

1. Remove rear half of floor mat.

2. Remove cap screws (1) and plastic cover (2).

3. Remove cap screws (3) and rear cab access floor plate (4).


2— Plastic Cover


4— Rear Cab Access Floor

Plate

BT40170,0000043 -19-16JAN08-1/2

4. Disconnect hose (5) from bulkhead fitting (6).

5. Connect remote pressure source to bulkhead fitting.

Pressure source must be within specification.

Specification

Remote Pressure

Source—Pressure...................................................... 1379—24 821 kPa

14—248 bar

200—3600 psi

6. Lower boom using pilot controls.

7. Disconnect remote pressure source.

8. Connect hose to bulkhead fitting (6).

9. Install rear access floor plate.

10. Install plastic cover and floor mat.

5— Hose 6— Pilot Pressure Bulkhead

Fitting

BT40170,0000043 -19-16JAN08-2/2

Check Park Brake

CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from unexpected machine movement. Fasten seat belt before performing this check.


2. Start machine on dry, hard pavement.

3. Raise loader and backhoe buckets off ground.

4. Push right half of park brake switch (1) to disengage the park brake.

5. Disengage MFWD, if equipped.

6. Move the transmission control lever (TCL) to F. Move the gearshift lever to 2nd gear.

7. Depress the speed control pedal to the floor and drive approximately 7 m (20 ft), then push left half of park brake switch to engage the park brake. The machine


must stop within 2 m (6 ft) and transmission must shift to neutral.

VD76477,0001139 -19-07JUL09-1/1

4-1-20

020113

PN=170


Bleeding Fuel System

NOTE: Whenever the fuel system has been opened up for service (lines disconnected or filters removed), or if machine has run out of fuel, it may be necessary to bleed air from the system.

CAUTION: Escaping fluid under pressure can penetrate the skin causing serious injury. Relieve pressure before disconnecting fuel or other lines. Tighten all connections before applying pressure. Keep hands and body away from pinholes and nozzles that eject fluids under high pressure. Use a piece of cardboard or paper to search for leaks. Do not use your hand.

If ANY fluid is injected into the skin, a doctor familiar with this type of injury must surgically remove it within a few hours or gangrene may result. Doctors unfamiliar with this type of injury may call the Deere & Company

Medical Department in Moline, Illinois, or other knowledgeable medical source.

Tier 2/Stage II Engine

NOTE: If machine is equipped with auxiliary water separator fuel filter the fuel tank must be completely full.

1. Fill fuel tank.

2. Open bleed screw (7) on final fuel filter (2).

3. Pump primer lever (8) on fuel transfer pump until air free fuel stream is observed out of the bleed screw.

NOTE: The primer lever may need to be pressed approximately 65 times.

4. Close bleed screw on final fuel filter.

5. Pump primer lever on fuel transfer pump until resistance is felt.

NOTE: The primer lever may need to be pressed approximately 15 times.

Final Fuel Filter on Tier 2/Stage II Engine


2— Final Fuel Filter

3— Water Separator Assembly


8— Primer Lever

6. Push primer lever toward engine as far as possible.

7. Start engine.

Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine

The fuel system for Tier 3/Stage IIIA engine is self-bleeding.

1. Fill fuel tank.

2. Turn key switch to the ON position.

3. Wait 2 minutes.

4. Turn key switch to the OFF position.

5. Turn key switch back to the ON position.

6. Wait 2 minutes.

7. Start engine.

TX18203,00004B9 -19-09JUL09-1/1

4-1-21

020113

PN=171

Brake Bleeding Procedure


1

2

4

3

TX1074504

1— Bleed Screw (right side)

Brake Bleeding Procedure Using Bleed Screw Method

2— Clear Plastic Tube

3— Container

4— Bleed Screw (left side)

CAUTION: Avoid personal injury. Do not operate machine if pedal travel exceeds 133 mm (5.25

in.) while applying 267 N (60 lb-force). Operating machine with excessive brake travel could cause brakes not to stop machine on first application.

methods are much slower methods but may be used as alternates.

Bleed Screw Method

NOTE: Two people are required to bleed brake system oil, one to operate brake valve and other to open and close bleed screws.

NOTE: Air will "gravity bleed" from brake system through brake valve without use of bleed screws but the procedure may take much longer so bleed screw method is the recommended procedure. Brake lines must be inclined toward brake valve for procedures other than bleed method.

CAUTION: Hot oil can cause serious burn injury. Secure drain hose on bleed screw and in container to prevent it from blowing off when bleed screw is opened while brakes are applied.

Low ambient temperature or aeration of oil will slow bleed process.

The rear axle is equipped with two brake bleed screws, one for each wheel. Brake bleeding must be done whenever the brake system has been opened to repair or after replacing the brake valve, brake lines, fitting, O-rings or axle internal brake parts.

1. Secure a clear plastic tube (2) on bleed screw (4) with hose clamp and secure other end in a small container

(3).

2. Start engine and run at slow idle with park brake on.

3. Steer from right to left stop-to-stop three times to fill the brake valve reservoir.

Both brake pedals may be depressed at one time even though bleeding is done one side at a time.

4. Shut off engine.

All fittings must be inspected for leaks and tightened if leaks occur.

NOTE: Only two pedal bleeding applications can be done without refilling the brake valve reservoir.

The preferred method for the brake bleeding procedure is to use the bleed screw method. The vacuum and manual

Bleed screw must be closed before the fully depressed pedal reaches the floor.


JH38101,0000189 -19-23SEP10-1/3

4-1-22

020113

PN=172


5. Depress and hold the brake pedal, and open one

(side) service brake bleed screw to allow air and oil mixture into a container. Close bleed screw before pedal reaches maximum travel or floor.

If the bleeding procedure (applying brake pedal full distance or travel) is done more than twice, fill the brake valve reservoir again by starting the machine and steering from stop-to-stop three times.

Repeat the process until oil from bleed screw runs clear and without air.

6. Repeat process for opposite side.

7. After bleeding process is completed, pump each pedal to check if pedal is firm.

JH38101,0000189 -19-23SEP10-2/3

8. Check brake pedal (1) travel distance (A) to specification by measuring from floor to brake pedal as shown.

Specification

Dual Brake Pedal

Travel—Max. Distance.................................................................. 95 mm

3.75 in.

Single Brake Pedal

Travel—Max. Distance.................................................................114 mm

4.5 in.

9. Recycle old oil.

Vacuum Method

1. Engage park brake. Connect a vacuum to breather port on hydraulic reservoir. After 10 minutes, disconnect air pressure.

2. Leave hose from breather port to vacuum device connected until brake circuit is filled with oil. Both pedals should become solid.

3.

Check brake pedal (1) travel distance (A) to specification by measuring from floor to brake pedal as shown.

Manual Method

1. Engage park brake. Run engine at slow idle.

2. Steer from stop-to-stop three or four times to fill the brake valve reservoir.

3. Pump left-hand brake pedal five times, allowing 2 seconds between each pump for air to escape.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until the left-hand pedal is solid.

1

1— Brake Pedal

A

Brake Pedal Travel

A—Travel Distance

5. Pump right-hand pedal until pedal is solid, then pump both pedals together until pedals are solid.

6.

Check brake pedal (1) travel distance (A) to specification by measuring from floor to brake pedal as shown.

JH38101,0000189 -19-23SEP10-3/3

4-1-23

020113

PN=173


Service Recommendations For Snap-To-Connect (STC®) Fittings

Snap-To-Connect (STC®) fittings are used on this machine. The fittings are designed to allow the hydraulic hose to rotate as needed when the system is not pressurized. This prevents the hydraulic hoses from binding when components are put back to their operating position.

Fittings are easily disconnected using JDG1385 Special

Tool (1) (supplied with machine). The special tool has a different size slot cut into each end. The narrow slot is for -06 size fittings. The wide slot is for -08 size fittings.

Use appropriate end of special tool on fitting being disconnected. To connect fittings, simply push each half of fitting together.

IMPORTANT: DO NOT pry against release sleeve or damage to fitting may result.

DO NOT force release sleeve beyond normal range of travel, otherwise, release sleeve may fall off when hose is disconnected. If this happens and fitting is connected without the release sleeve installed, fitting will not be able to be disconnected again.

JDG1385 Special Tool Storage Location In Toolbox

1.

Disconnect STC type fittings: a. Clean area around fitting, especially around the release sleeve (3).

STC Fitting and JDG1385 Special Tool

b. While keeping JDG1385 Special Tool perpendicular to the fitting, insert tool between release sleeve and shoulder (2).

c. Gently push,

DO NOT PRY

, release sleeve away from shoulder to disconnect the fitting.

d. Pull hose to disconnect.

Snap-To-Connect is a trademark of Eaton Corp

1— JDG1385 Special Tool

2— Shoulder


3— Release Sleeve

MD04263,000032B -19-05NOV10-1/2

4-1-24

020113

PN=174


2. Inspect STC fittings: a. Check seal mating surfaces for nicks, scratches, or flat spots.

b. Check O-ring (4), backup ring (5), and retaining ring

(2) for wear or damage.

c. Make sure O-ring, backup ring, and retaining ring are in position before connecting fitting halves together.

3. Connect STC fittings: a. Make sure fitting halves (3 and 6) are clean and free of contaminants.

b. Make sure release sleeve (1) is on male half of STC fitting (6) before connecting fitting halves together.

c. Push fitting halves together until a definite snap and solid stop is felt.

d. Pull back on hose to make sure fitting halves are locked together.

e. To prevent hoses from binding, move component into position before pressurizing hydraulic system.

STC Fitting Cross Section

1— Release Sleeve


3— Female Half of STC Fitting

4— O-Ring

5— Backup Ring

6— Male Half of STC Fitting

MD04263,000032B -19-05NOV10-2/2

Adjusting Pilot Control Wrist Rest—If

Equipped

1. Turn lever (1) counterclockwise to loosen.

2. Adjust wrist rest (2) up or down to desired position.

3. Turn lever clockwise to tighten.

1— Lever 2— Wrist Rest

HG31779,00001BE -19-09JUL09-1/1

4-1-25

020113

PN=175


Toe-In Check and Adjust

Non-Powered Axle and

SPECIFICATIONS

Mechanical Front Wheel Drive

(MFWD) Axle Toe-In Distance

3—6 mm

0.13—0.25 in.

Tie Rod Jam Nut Torque 120 N•m

89 lb-ft

Toe-In Measurement Check

1. Measure distance from ground to center of both hubs

(A). Mark front (B) and rear (C) of each front tire in center of tread.

2. Measure distance between front marks (B) and rear marks (C).

3. Front marks must be closer than rear marks within specification.

Specification

Non-Powered Axle and Mechanical Front

Wheel Drive (MFWD)

Axle—Distance...........................................................................3—6 mm

0.13—0.25 in.

A—Center of Hub

B—Front of Tire

Toe-In Measurement

C—Rear of Tire

D—Tie Rod Tube

4. If measurements are not within specification, see your authorized dealer for adjustment.

VD76477,00012C0 -19-07JUL09-1/1

4-1-26

020113

PN=176


Installing Teeth on Backhoe Bucket

1. Position flex pin (C) with grooves (D) toward the tooth tip. The grooves are the locking mechanism.

NOTE: If "back" is stamped on the pin, this word must face the shank.

If shank is badly worn, install new shank.

Install special teeth for digging in rock or frost.

2. To remove tooth tip (A), drive out flex pin.

3. To fasten tooth tip to shank (B), drive flex pin in place.

A—Tooth Tip

B—Tooth Shank

C—Flex Pin

D—Groove

Do Not Service Control Valves, Cylinders,

Pumps or Motors

Special tools and information are needed to service control valves, cylinders, pumps, or motors.

TX,90,BD2190 -19-07JUL09-1/1

If these parts need service, see your authorized dealer.

T82,EXMA,BJ -19-16JAN08-1/1

4-1-27

020113

PN=177


Keep ROPS Installed Properly

CAUTION: Make certain all parts are reinstalled correctly if the rollover protective structure

(ROPS) is loosened or removed for any reason.

Tighten mounting bolts to proper torque.

The protection offered by ROPS will be impaired if ROPS is subjected to structural damage, is involved in an overturn incident, or is in any way altered. A damaged ROPS should be replaced, not reused.

When installation of equipment on a machine necessitates loosening or removing ROPS, mounting bolts must be tightened to specification.

Specification

ROPS Mounting

Bolts—Torque..............................................................................420 N·m

310 lb-ft

Hardware Torque Specifications

Check cap screws and nuts to be sure they are tight.

If hardware is loose, tighten to torque shown on the following charts unless a special torque is specified.

VD76477,0001141 -19-21DEC06-1/1

TX,90,FF1225 -19-16JAN08-1/1

4-1-28

020113

PN=178


Unified Inch Bolt and Screw Torque Values

TS1671 —UN—01MAY03

Bolt or Screw

Size

1/4

5/16

SAE Grade 1

Lubricated

b

Dry

c

SAE Grade 2

a

Lubricated

b

Dry

c

SAE Grade 5, 5.1 or 5.2

Lubricated

b

Dry

c

SAE Grade 8 or 8.2

Lubricated

b

Dry

c

N·m lb.-in.

N·m lb.-in.

N·m lb.-in.

N·m lb.-in.

N·m lb.-in.

N·m lb.-in.

N·m lb.-in.

N·m lb.-in.

3.7

33 4.7

42 6 53 7.5

66 9.5

84 12 106 13.5

120 17 150

7.7

68 9.8

86 12 106 15.5

137 19.5

172 25 221

N·m lb.-ft.

N·m lb.-ft.

28 20.5

35 26

3/8

7/16

1/2

9/16

5/8

3/4

7/8

1

1-1/8

1-1/4

1-3/8

13.5

22

N·m lb.-ft.

34 25

48

67

120

190

285

400

570

750

120 17.5

155 22 194 27 240

N·m lb.-ft.

N·m lb.-ft.

N·m lb.-ft.

194 28 20.5

35 26 44 32.5

35.5

49

88

140

210

300

420

550

42

60

85

150

240

360

510

725

950

31

45

63

110

175

265

375

535

700

53

76

105

190

190

285

400

570

750

39

56

77

140

140

210

300

420

550

67

95

135

240

240

360

510

725

950

49

70

100

175

175

265

375

535

700

N·m lb.-ft.

N·m lb.-ft.

35

56

85

125

170

300

490

730

910

1280

1700

26

41

63

92

125

220

360

540

670

945

1250

44

70

110

155

215

380

615

920

1150

1630

2140

32.5

52

80

115

160

280

455

680

850

1200

1580

49

80

120

175

240

425

690

1030

1450

2050

2700

36

59

88

130

175

315

510

760

1075

1500

2000

63

100

155

220

305

540

870

1300

1850

2600

3400

46

74

115

165

225

400

640

960

1350

1920

2500

1-1/2 990 730 1250 930 990 730 1250 930 2250 1650 2850 2100 3600 2650 4550 3350

Torque values listed are for general use only, based on the strength of the bolt or screw. DO NOT use these values if a different torque value or tightening procedure is given for a specific application. For plastic insert or crimped steel type lock nuts, for stainless steel fasteners, or for nuts on U-bolts, see the tightening instructions for the specific application. Shear bolts are designed to fail under predetermined loads. Always replace shear bolts with identical grade.

Replace fasteners with the same or higher grade. If higher grade fasteners are used, tighten these to the strength of the original. Make sure fastener threads are clean and that you properly start thread engagement. When possible, lubricate plain or zinc plated fasteners other than lock nuts, wheel bolts or wheel nuts, unless different instructions are given for the specific application.

a

Grade 2 applies for hex cap screws (not hex bolts) up to 6 in. (152 mm) long. Grade 1 applies for hex cap screws over 6 in. (152 mm) long, and for all other types of bolts and screws of any length.

b

“Lubricated” means coated with a lubricant such as engine oil, fasteners with phosphate and oil coatings, or 7/8 in.

and larger fasteners with JDM F13C, F13F or F13J zinc flake coating.

c

“Dry” means plain or zinc plated without any lubrication, or 1/4 to 3/4 in. fasteners with JDM F13B, F13E or F13H zinc flake coating.

DX,TORQ1 -19-12JAN11-1/1

4-1-29

020113

PN=179


Metric Bolt and Screw Torque Values

TS1670 —UN—01MAY03

4.8

8.8

8.8

9.8

9.8

10.9

10.9

12.9

12.9

12.9

12.9

Bolt or Screw

Size

M6

M8

M10

Class 4.8

Lubricated

a

Dry

b

Class 8.8 or 9.8

Lubricated

a

Dry

b

Class 10.9

Lubricated

a

Dry

b

Class 12.9

Lubricated

a

Dry

b

N·m lb.-in.

N·m lb.-in.

N·m lb.-in.

N·m lb.-in.

N·m lb.-in.

N·m lb.-in.

N·m lb.-in.

N·m lb.-in.

4.7

42 6 53 8.9

79 11.3

100 13 115 16.5

146 15.5

137 19.5

172

11.5

102 14.5

128 22 194 27.5

243

N·m lb.-ft.

N·m lb.-ft.

N·m lb.-ft.

N·m lb.-ft.

32 23.5

40 29.5

37 27.5

47 35

N·m lb.-ft.

N·m lb.-ft.

N·m lb.-ft.

29 21 43 32 55 40 63 46 80 59 75 55 95 70 23 204

N·m lb.-ft.

40

63

29.5

46

100

135

74

100

50

80

125

170

37

59

92

125

75

120

190

265

55

88

140

195

95

150

240

330

70

110

175

245

110

175

275

375

80

130

200

275

140

220

350

475

105

165

255

350

130

205

320

440

95

150

235

325

165

260

400

560

120

190

300

410

M12

M14

M16

M18

M20

M22

M24

M27

190

265

330

490

140

195

245

360

245

330

425

625

180

245

315

460

375

510

650

950

275

375

475

650

350

480

530

725

390

535

675

920

500

680

625

850

460 790 580

625 1080 800

480 820 600 920 680 1150 850 1080 800 1350 1000

700 1200 885 1350 1000 1700 1250 1580 1160 2000 1475

M30

M33

660

900

490 850 625 1290 950 1630 1200 1850 1350 2300 1700 2140 1580 2700 2000

665 1150 850 1750 1300 2200 1625 2500 1850 3150 2325 2900 2150 3700 2730

M36 1150 850 1450 1075 2250 1650 2850 2100 3200 2350 4050 3000 3750 2770 4750 3500

Torque values listed are for general use only, based on the strength of the bolt or screw. DO NOT use these values if a different torque value or tightening procedure is given for a specific application. For stainless steel fasteners or for nuts on U-bolts, see the tightening instructions for the specific application. Tighten plastic insert or crimped steel type lock nuts by turning the nut to the dry torque shown in the chart, unless different instructions are given for the specific application.

Shear bolts are designed to fail under predetermined loads. Always replace shear bolts with identical property class. Replace fasteners with the same or higher property class. If higher property class fasteners are used, tighten these to the strength of the original. Make sure fastener threads are clean and that you properly start thread engagement. When possible, lubricate plain or zinc plated fasteners other than lock nuts, wheel bolts or wheel nuts, unless different instructions are given for the specific application.

a

“Lubricated” means coated with a lubricant such as engine oil, fasteners with phosphate and oil coatings, or M20 and larger fasteners with JDM F13C, F13F or F13J zinc flake coating.

b

“Dry” means plain or zinc plated without any lubrication, or M6 to M18 fasteners with JDM F13B, F13E or F13H zinc flake coating.

DX,TORQ2 -19-12JAN11-1/1

Inspect Loader Boom Service Lock

1. Inspect loader boom service lock (1), cotter pin, and retaining pin to ensure that all are in good condition.

2. Verify that warning decal is in place.

3. See your authorized dealer for replacement parts.

1— Loader Boom Service Lock

4-1-30

MB60223,00000E8 -19-11MAR09-1/1

020113

PN=180

Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout

Operational Checkout Procedure

Use this procedure to check all systems and functions on the machine. It is designed so you can make a quick check of machine operation while doing both a walk around inspection and performing specific checks from the operator’s seat.

Should you experience a problem with your machine, you will find helpful diagnostic information in this checkout that will pinpoint the cause. Use the table of contents to help find adjustment procedures. This information may allow you to perform simple repairs yourself, reducing machine down time.

The information obtained after completing the operational checkout will allow you or your authorized dealer to pinpoint a specific test or repair needed to restore the machine to specifications.

A location will be required which is level and has adequate space to complete the checks. No tools or equipment are needed to perform this checkout.

Complete the necessary visual checks (oil levels, oil condition, external leaks, loose hardware, linkage, wiring, etc.) prior to doing the checkout. The machine must be at operating temperature for many of the checks.

Locate the check to be performed at the top of the left column and read completely down the column before performing the check. Follow this sequence from left to right. In the far right column, if no problem is found, you will be instructed to go to next check. If a problem is indicated, you will be referred to either a group in this manual or to your authorized dealer for repair.

MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-1/46

Diagnostic Trouble Code Check

MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-2/46

•

1 Display and Clear

Trouble Codes

Always check for diagnostic trouble codes and correct them before performing the operational checkout.

Diagnostic trouble codes can be displayed by using two methods:

•

Standard Display Monitor (SDM)

•

Service Advisor

YES:

Correct all diagnostics trouble codes before proceeding. See your authorized dealer.

NO:

Proceed with operational checkout.

MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-3/46

Key Switch Off, Engine Off Checks

•

1 Battery Check

MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-4/46

TX1003151 —19—30JAN06

Key switch OFF.

Press SELECT button, on Standard Display Monitor (SDM), and hold until battery volts are displayed.

NOTE: Fuel gauge will calibrate against the far left peg before returning to its normal operating position and engine hours will be displayed.

LOOK: Does battery volts read a minimum of 12 volts?


YES:

Go to next check.

NO:

Test battery.

MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-5/46

4-2-1

020113

PN=181

Key Switch ON, Engine Off Checks

Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout


MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-6/46

4-2-2

020113

PN=182


•

1 Standard Display

Monitor (SDM) Check

TX1003145 —UN—02FEB06

Model Number

TX1003151 —19—30JAN06

Key switch ON (engine NOT running).

Observe monitor and note changes (bulbs, indicators and gauges).

Press NEXT until the SDM displays gear, engine speed and hour meter.

NOTE: Starting motor must not operate.

LOOK: Do all lights and backlighting come on?

Does the display show the correct model number?

Do all gauge indicators point to approximately 12:00 o’clock position and then move to their normal operating position?

YES:

Go to next check.

NO:


TX1003153 —19—02FEB06


Observe monitor. Press the NEXT button.

LOOK: Does the display show volts, gear and engine speed?

YES:

Go to next check.

NO:


TX1003147 —UN—02FEB06



LOOK: Does the display show gear, engine speed and hydraulic oil temperature?

YES:

Go to next check.

NO:



4-2-3

MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-7/46

020113

PN=183

•

2 Service Brake Pedal

Stop Check


N

J O B 1 3 2 . 4

0

TX1003154 —19—22JAN07



LOOK: Does the display show gear, engine speed and job timer hours?

YES:

Go to next check.

NO:


MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-8/46

•

3 Ride Control Electrical

Check (If Equipped)

T134625 —UN—19OCT00

Unlock brake pedals.

Lift left and right brake pedals individually.

LOOK: Does each pedal have a minimal amount of travel before cap screws contact stop?

NOTE: Gap between pedal stop screws and plate should be 0.127—0.381

mm (0.005—0.015 in.).

This travel ensures that brake check valves are opened and brakes are released.

YES:

Go to next check.

NO:


MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-9/46

TX1002661 —UN—13JAN06

Turn key switch ON (do not start engine).

Turn ride control switch ON.

LOOK: Does the ride control switch on the Sealed Switch Module (SSM) indicator light turn ON?

Turn ride control switch OFF.

LOOK: Does the ride control switch on the Sealed Switch Module (SSM) indicator light turn off?

YES:

Go to next check.

NO:


YES:

Go to next check.

NO:


MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-10/46

Key Switch On, Engine On


MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-11/46

4-2-4

020113

PN=184


•

1 Park Brake Indicator and Switch Check

TX1003182 —UN—30JAN06

Fasten Seat Belt.

Operator's seat facing loader position.

Apply service brakes.

Start the engine.

Engine speed at slow idle.

LOOK: Is the PARK BRAKE indicator on?

TX1016611 —UN—12APR10

Release park brake.

LOOK: Is the Park Brake indicator OFF?

Apply park brake.

Stop the engine.


YES:

Go to next check.

NO:


MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-12/46

4-2-5

020113

PN=185


•

2 Start Circuit Check

TX1003174 —UN—30JAN06

R E L E A S E

P A R K B R A K E

TX1003152 —19—22JAN07

Fasten seat belt.


Move transmission control lever (TCL) to 1st gear forward (1F).


Start the engine.


NOTE: The engine will start with transmission control lever (TCL) in forward (F) or reverse (R) but the controller will automatically shift the transmission to neutral (N).

LOOK/LISTEN: Does the engine start?

Does display show RELEASE PARK BRAKE?

TX1003148 —UN—02FEB06


Release park brake.

Move transmission control lever (TCL) to neutral.

NOTE: Display will not show “F” forward or “R” reverse until the transmission control lever (TCL) is cycled to neutral and the park brake has been released.

LOOK: Does display show neutral (N).

YES:

Go to next check.

TX1003149 —UN—30JAN06

Move transmission control lever (TCL) to 1st gear forward.

LOOK: Does display show 1F?


4-2-6

NO:


MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-13/46

020113

PN=186


•

3 Reverse Warning

Alarm Check

TX1003175 —UN—30JAN06

1R Gearshift Lever

•

4 Transmission Gear

Shift Detent Check

TX1003150 —UN—30JAN06

1R Display




Move transmission control lever (TCL) to 1st gear reverse (1R).

LOOK/LISTEN: Does display show correct gear and direction?

Does the reverse warning alarm sound?

YES:

Go to next check.

NO:


MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-14/46

TX1003176 —UN—30JAN06

Fasten seat belt.

Start the engine.




Release park brake.

Move transmission control lever (TCL) into forward (F).

Turn transmission control lever (TCL) to shift into each gear.

LOOK: Does gear number align with pointer in each speed detent position?

Does twist handle remain in detented positions?

Does display indicate correct gear and direction?


YES:

Go to next check.

NO:

Replace transmission control lever (TCL)/range switch.

MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-15/46

4-2-7

020113

PN=187


•

5 Park Brake Function

Check

TX1016611 —UN—12APR10

Fasten seat belt.

Start the engine.




Release park brake.

Move transmission control lever (TCL) to 3rd gear forward (3F).

Slowly increase engine speed just enough to allow machine to start to move a few feet.

Apply the Park Brake.

NOTE: Transmission will shift to neutral (N) as soon as Park Brake is applied.

LOOK/FEEL: Does Park Brake engage immediately, when Park Brake Switch is pushed and does the machine stop?

YES:

Go to next check.

NO:


MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-16/46

•

6 Pilot Control Tower

Operating/Stored

Position Check (If

Equipped)

Move pilot control towers into operating position.

Release towers.

LOOK/FEEL: Do towers stay in operating position?

Move pilot control towers into stored position.

LOOK/FEEL: Do towers stay in stored position?

YES:

Go to next check.

NO:


MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-17/46

•

7 Pilot Control

Enable/Disable Switch


Run engine at 1500 rpm.

CAUTION: Prevent possible crushing injury from heavy component. Use appropriate lifting device.

Raise machine off ground with stabilizers and loader bucket.

Specification

310J—Weight (approximate).............................................................................. 7321 kg

16 140 lb

Disable pilot controls and move control levers.

LOOK: Do activated functions move?


NO:

Continue with check.

YES:


MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-18/46

4-2-8

020113

PN=188

•

8 Pilot Control Pattern

Select Switch Check

(If Equipped)

Enable pilot controls.


Select backhoe from the two position pattern select switch.

Activate left and right pilot control levers forward and backward.

LOOK: Does backhoe boom move when left pilot control lever is activated?

Does backhoe crowd move when right pilot control lever is activated?

Select excavator from the two position pattern select switch.

Activate left and right pilot control levers forward and backward.

LOOK: Does backhoe crowd move when left pilot control lever is activated?

Does backhoe boom move when right pilot control lever is activated?

•

9 Pilot Control Valve



Move pilot control levers in all directions.

FEEL/LOOK: Do levers move freely in all directions?

FEEL/LOOK: Do levers spring back to neutral when released?

YES:

Continue with check.

NO:


YES:

Go to next check.

NO:


MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-19/46

YES:

Go to next check.

NO:

If pilot control levers bind during travel or do not return to neutral position, inspect controls and towers.


MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-20/46

••

10 Pilot Control

Accumulator Check

(If Equipped)

Run engine at 1500 rpm.

Operators seat in backhoe position.


Disengage boom from boom lock.

Hold boom up function over relief for 10 seconds.

Turn engine off, and turn key switch to on.

NOTE: Pilot control enable switch must be cycled after key switch is turned back into on position.

Cycle pilot enable switch to enable position.

Activate boom down function.

LOOK: Does boom lower when boom down function is activated?

••

11 Backhoe Position

Control Pattern


Operator's seat facing backhoe position.

Activate stabilizer lever to lower and raise left stabilizer.

Activate stabilizer lever to lower and raise right stabilizer

LOOK: Do both stabilizers raise and lower?


YES:

Go to next check.

NO:


MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-21/46

YES:

Continue check.

NO:


MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-22/46

4-2-9

020113

PN=189


••

12 Stabilizer Cylinder

Check

Engine speed at approximately 1500 rpm.

Position loader bucket off the ground.

Operator's seat facing backhoe position.

CAUTION: Machine will move forward as transmission control lever (TCL) is moved into forward (F).


Lower stabilizers to raise rear of machine off the ground.

Specification


16 140 lb

LOOK/FEEL: Do cylinders extend smoothly and hold machine up?

Raise stabilizers.

LOOK/FEEL: Do cylinders retract smoothly and remain up?

YES:

Go to next check.

NO:


MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-23/46

••

13 Hydraulic and

Transmission Oil

Warmup Procedure

IMPORTANT: For the following checks all systems must be warmed up to operating range to get accurate test results.

Check hydraulic oil temperature. If hydraulic oil temperature is not to specification allow machine time to warm up to normal operating range.

Specification

Hydraulic Oil—Temperature............................................................................. 60—70°C

140—160°F

Check transmission oil temperature. If transmission oil temperature is not to specification allow machine time to warm up to normal operating range.

YES:

Go to next check.

Specification

Transmission Oil—Temperature...................................................................... 60—70°C

140—160°F

Are hydraulic and transmission oil temperature to specification?

NO:

Warm system to specification.


MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-24/46

4-2-10

020113

PN=190

••

14 Cycle Times Check

Engine at fast idle.


Record cycle time for each function.

Does machine perform within specifications?

YES:

Go to next check.


4-2-11

MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-25/46

020113

PN=191


Specification

Loader boom raise (bucket flat on ground-to-full height)—Maximum Cycle

Time (seconds)............................................................................... 310J - 4.9 (seconds)

310SJ - 5.5 (seconds)

Loader boom lower—Powered

(full height-to-bucket flat on ground)—Maximum Cycle Time..................................................... 310J - 2.5 (seconds)


Loader boom lower—Float

(full height-to-bucket flat on ground)—Maximum Cycle Time..................................................... 310J - 2.5 (seconds)


Loader bucket dump (boom just above ground—Maximum Cycle Time....................................................... 310J - 2.6 (seconds)


Loader bucket curl (boom just above ground)—Maximum Cycle Time................................................................ 2.6 (seconds)

Backhoe boom raise (backhoe at maximum reach, bucket teeth on ground-to-boom at cushion)—Maximum

Cycle Time................................................................................................. 2.9 (seconds)

Backhoe boom lower (backhoe at maximum reach, bucket teeth on ground-to-boom at cushion)—Maximum

Cycle Time................................................................................................. 2.9 (seconds)

Crowd in (boom in transport position)—Maximum Cycle Time............................................................... 3.1 (seconds)

Crowd out (boom in transport position)—Maximum Cycle Time............................................................... 2.7 (seconds)

Backhoe bucket dump—Maximum Cycle

Time........................................................................................................... 2.4 (seconds)

Backhoe bucket curl—Maximum Cycle

Time........................................................................................................... 3.2 (seconds)

Backhoe swing (boom raised to cushion, bucket curled, dipperstick parallel to ground cylinder-cushion-to-cylinder-cushion

(180°))—Maximum Cycle Time.................................................................. 3.3 (seconds)

Extendible dipperstick extend—If

Equipped—Maximum Cycle Time.............................................................. 2.4 (seconds)

Extendible dipperstick retract—If

Equipped—Maximum Cycle Time.............................................................. 2.6 (seconds)

Right stabilizer down (full up-to-ground level)—Maximum Cycle Time.................................................................... 2.5 (seconds)

Right stabilizer up (ground level-to-full up)—Maximum Cycle Time........................................................................ 2.5 (seconds)

Left stabilizer down (full up-to-ground level)—Maximum Cycle Time.................................................................... 2.5 (seconds)

Left stabilizer up (ground level-to-full up)—Maximum Cycle Time........................................................................ 2.5 (seconds)

Steering right to left—Turns................................................................................. 2.3 to 3

Steering left to right—Turns................................................................................. 2.3 to 3

Steering right to left (MFWD)—Turns.................................................................. 2.3 to 3

Steering left to right (MFWD)—Turns.................................................................. 2.3 to 3

Does machine perform within specifications?

NO:

Check hydraulic oil level. See Check

Hydraulic Reservoir Oil



NO:


MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-26/46

4-2-12

020113

PN=192


••

15 Brake System Leakage

Check

NO:

Go to next check.

••

16 Brake Drag/Park

Brake Check

T134626 —UN—19OCT00

Depress and hold left brake pedal, then right brake pedal using approximately 267 N

(60 lb-force).

Specification

Brake Pedal—Force................................................................................................267 N

60 lb

LOOK: Brake pedal must not feel spongy (caused by air in the system). Does pedal settle more than 25 mm (1.0 in.) per minute.

YES:

Bleed brake system.

See Brake Bleeding

Procedure. (Section 4-1.)

MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-27/46

T6171AL —UN—09DEC88

Operator's seat in loader position.

Position machine on a gradual slope with front of machine facing downhill.

Lift loader bucket off the ground.

Transmission control lever (TCL) to neutral.

Differential lock not actuated.

TX1016611 —UN—12APR10

Release park brake.

Release service brakes.

Let machine coast freely for several feet.

Apply park brake.

LOOK: Did machine stop?

Release park brake.

LOOK: Did machine coast freely?

NOTE: If machine does not move freely on slope, drive the machine for 5 minutes.

Feel axle housing area to locate which brake is dragging.


YES:

Go to next check.

NO:


MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-28/46

4-2-13

020113

PN=193


••

17 Engine Speed Select

Knob Check

TX1003184 —UN—30JAN06

Engine speed slow idle.

Auto-Idle OFF.

Lower all equipment to the ground.

Operator’s seat facing backhoe position.

Transmission control lever (TCL) in neutral.

Move speed control knob to slow idle, then to fast idle position.

LOOK: Does tachometer read 900—925 rpm (Slow Idle) and 2400—2425 rpm (Fast

Idle)?



Move speed select knob to increase engine speed to 1200 rpm.

YES:

Continue check.

NO:



Raise rear wheels of machine off the ground.

Specification


16 140 lb

Mechanical front wheel drive (MFWD) not actuated.

Move transmission control lever (TCL) to 1st gear forward.

LOOK/LISTEN: Does engine speed return to slow idle?

YES:

Go to next check.

NO:



Operator’s seat facing loader position.


Move speed select knob to increase engine speed to 1200 rpm.


LOOK/LISTEN: Does engine speed return to slow idle?

Release service brakes.

LOOK/LISTEN: Does engine speed return to 1200 rpm?

YES:

Continue check.

NO:


NO:

Go to next check.

YES:


MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-29/46

••

18 Engine Speed Control

Pedal Check





Move the engine speed control pedal from slow idle to fast idle.

LOOK: Does tachometer read 900—925 rpm (Slow Idle) and 2400—2425 rpm (Fast

Idle)?


YES:

Continue check.

NO:


MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-30/46

4-2-14

020113

PN=194


••

19 Auto-Idle Circuit


••

20 Engine and Torque

Converter Check

(Without MFWD)

TX1002663 —UN—13JAN06

Engine speed fast idle.

Auto-Idle switch OFF (Indicator light OFF).




Push Auto-Idle Switch to ON.

LOOK/LISTEN: Does engine speed decrease after 4 to 6 seconds? Does Auto-Idle indicator light come ON?

Slowly actuate any boom backhoe function.

LOOK/LISTEN: Does engine speed return to its original setting?

Rotate operator's seat to loader position.

LOOK/LISTEN: Does engine speed return to slow idle.

LOOK: Does Auto-Idle indicator light go OFF?

YES:

Go to next check.

NO:


YES:

Go to next check.

NO:


YES:

Go to next check.

NO:


MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-31/46

T6171AM —UN—09DEC88



Position machine with loader bucket at ground level against a dirt bank or immovable object.

Move transmission control lever (TCL) to forward (F) position.

Engage differential lock.

Increase engine speed to fast idle.

Release park brake.

LOOK: Do rear wheels stall?

NOTE: This test will give a general indication of engine, transmission and torque converter performance.


YES:

Go to next check.

NO:


MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-32/46

4-2-15

020113

PN=195


••

21 Transmission Neutral

Disconnect Circuit

Check

Fasten seat belt. Operator’s seat facing loader position.

Engine speed approximately 2000 rpm.

Raise loader bucket off the ground.

Shift transmission into 4th gear.

Release park brake.

Shift transmission control lever (TCL) to forward (F).

LISTEN: Does engine rpm drop (approximately 50 rpm) when the transmission control lever (TCL) is shifted into forward (F)?

Press button on loader control lever and note sound of engine.

LISTEN: Does engine rpm increase when the neutral disconnect button is pressed?

YES:

Go to next check.

NO:


MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-33/46

••

22 Differential Lock

Check

T6295AD —UN—19OCT88



Raise machine off the ground.

Specification


16 140 lb

Release park brake.

Unlock the brake pedals.

Turn mechanical front wheel drive (MFWD) switch OFF (if equipped).

Depress differential lock control.

Operate machine at approximately 1200 rpm in 1st forward (1F).

Apply one brake pedal.

LOOK: Both rear wheels must stop.

YES:

Go to next check.

NO:


MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-34/46

••

23 Differential Gear and

Pinion Check


Release park brake.

Shift transmission to first gear and operate engine at approximately 1500 rpm.


Steer machine in a maximum left turn and depress left brake pedal to stop the left wheel.

Steer machine in a maximum right turn and depress right brake pedal to stop the right wheel.

LISTEN: Can excessive gear noise be heard in the differential or pinion gear area?

YES:

Go to next check.

NO:



MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-35/46

4-2-16

020113

PN=196


••

24 Front Wheel Alignment

(Toe-In) Check

YES:

Go to next check.

••

25 Mechanical Front

Wheel Drive (MFWD)

Driving Check (If

Equipped)

T6264AI —UN—22OCT91

Drive machine in fourth gear forward on a surface with loose material.

LOOK: Is material from behind front wheels thrown excessively inward or outward?

NO:

See Toe-In Check and

Adjust. (Section 4-1.)

MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-36/46

T131717B —UN—15JUN00

MFWD Switch





Specification


16 140 lb

Release park brake.

Shift transmission to first gear and operate engine at approximately 1500 rpm.


Press and hold and then release the top half of the mechanical front wheel drive

(MFWD) switch.

LOOK: Do the front wheels turn when the switch is pressed and stop when it is released?

Press the bottom of the mechanical front wheel drive (MFWD) switch to engage mechanical front wheel drive (MFWD).

LOOK: Do the front wheel continue to turn.

YES:

Go to next check.

NO:


YES:

Go to next check.


NO:


MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-37/46

4-2-17

020113

PN=197


••



Differential Check



Specification


16 140 lb


Release park brake.

Shift transmission in first gear forward (1F).

Engage mechanical front wheel drive (MFWD).

Lower front wheels to just contact ground.

LOOK: Does at least one front wheel turn?

YES:

Go to next check.

NO:


MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-38/46

••



Gear and Pinion Check

Drive machine at transport speed with mechanical front wheel drive (MFWD) engaged, then disengage.

LISTEN: Does mechanical front wheel drive (MFWD) “whine” when disengaged?

NOTE: It is normal for mechanical front wheel drive (MFWD) to “whine” when engaged at transport speeds.

YES:

Go to next check.

NO:

If mechanical front wheel drive (MFWD)

“whines”, check oil levels and fill to correct level.

MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-39/46

••

28 Ride Control System


Run engine at fast idle.

Turn ride control ON.

Operator’s seat facing loader position and locked.

Raise loader boom to maximum height.

Power boom down half-way to the ground.

Stop suddenly by releasing the joystick.

LOOK: Is boom cushioned when joystick is released?

YES:

Go to next check.

NO:


MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-40/46

••

29 Hydraulic Loader

Coupler Check (If

Equipped)

CAUTION: Avoid unexpected movement. Position attachment on ground before releasing pin.

Operator’s seat facing loader position and locked.

Move coupler switch to disengage position.

LOOK/LISTEN: Do coupler pins retract?

LISTEN: Does chime sound?

LOOK: Does coupler indicator light come ON?


YES:

Go to next check.

NO:


MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-41/46

4-2-18

020113

PN=198


••

30 Steering System

Checks


Raise the loader bucket off the ground with the bottom level with the ground.


Raise rear of machine off the ground.

Specification


16 140 lb

Operate engine at approximately 1000 rpm.

Turn the steering wheel full left to full right several times.

LOOK: Did the front wheels move smoothly in both directions? When the steering wheel was stopped, did the wheels stop moving?

NOTE: Internal leakage or a sticking steering valve spool can cause wheels to continue to move after steering wheel is stopped.

YES:

Go to next check.

NO:

Wheels did NOT move smoothly in both directions.

Wheels continued to move after steering wheel was stopped. See your authorized dealer.

MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-42/46

••

31 Cylinder Cushion

Check

Engine speed idle.



Raise rear of machine off the ground.

Specification


16 140 lb

Boom must be lowered from the transport position.

Activate backhoe swing left and right.

Make a note of the sound and speed as cylinders near end of their stroke.

LOOK: Does swing speed decrease near the end of the cylinder stroke?

Repeat check using backhoe boom raise function.

YES:

Go to next check.

NO:


MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-43/46

••

32 Backhoe and Loader

Function Drift Check

Warm hydraulic oil to operating temperature for this check.

Specification

Hydraulic Oil—Temperature............................................................................. 60—70°C

140—160°F


Position backhoe fully extended with bucket at a 45° angle to the ground.

Lower boom until the bucket cutting edge is 50 mm (2.0 in.) off the ground.

Position loader bucket the same distance off of the ground as backhoe bucket.

Observe both bucket cutting edges for 1 minute.

LOOK: Are both bucket cutting edges still off the ground after 1 minute?

YES:

Go to next check.

NO:


MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-44/46


4-2-19

020113

PN=199


Cab System Checks

•

1 Cab System Checks

Operational Checkout

Do the following work properly?

•

Seat adjustment

•

Seat belt

•

Tilt wheel console

•

Dome light

•

Horn

•

Front and rear windshield wiper and washer

•

Four speed (five position) blower fan

•

Air conditioning

•

Heater

•

Door and window latches

•

Front and rear work lights

•

Drive and brake lights

•

Warning lights

•

Turn signals

•

Side shield latches

•

Grill housing

•

Fuel fill cap

•

Loader boom lock check

•

Backhoe boom lock check

•

Service decal check

•

Beacon (if equipped)

•

Auxiliary hydraulics (if equipped)

MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-45/46

YES:

Operational checkout complete.

NO:

Repair.

MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-46/46

4-2-20

020113

PN=200

Miscellaneous—Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting Procedure

NOTE: Troubleshooting charts are arranged from the simplest to verify, to least likely, more difficult to verify. When diagnosing a problem, use all possible means to isolate the problem to a single component or system. Use the following steps to diagnose problems:

Step 1. Operational Checkout Procedure

Step 2. Troubleshooting Charts

Step 3. Adjustments

Step 4. See your authorized John Deere dealer.

HG31779,0000020 -19-06MAY10-1/1

4-3-1

020113

PN=201

Miscellaneous—Troubleshooting

Engine

Symptom

Engine Cranks, But Will Not Start or Starts Hard

Problem

Fuel tank empty

Fuel tank vent plugged

No electrical power to ECU

Solution

Check fuel quantity.

Remove cap and listen for sound of air entering tank. Replace cap.

Turn key switch to ON position.

Replace fuse. Repair wiring.

Water in fuel or water frozen in fuel line Drain water from fuel tank. Inspect fuel filter for water. Change filter.

Debris in fuel or incorrect grade of fuel Check fuel tank outlet strainer for type of fuel debris. Check bottom of fuel tank for debris. Clean tank. Add fuel.

Check grade of fuel. Add correct fuel.

Air leak on suction side of fuel system Check for bubbles in fuel filter and tighten connections. Inspect fuel lines for damage.

Fuel transfer pump diaphragm leaking Check engine oil for fuel dilution.

Slow cranking speed Check battery and connections.

Incorrect engine oil (cold weather).

Restricted air filter Check air filter restriction indicator and air filters. Clean.

Restricted fuel filter

ECU fuse

Replace fuel filter.

Replace fuse.

Engine Surges or Stalls Frequently

Air in fuel Inspect filter for evidence of air in fuel.

Tighten connections and bleed fuel system.

Fuel tank vent plugged

Debris in fuel or incorrect grade of fuel Check fuel tank outlet strainer for debris. Check bottom of fuel tank for debris. Clean tank. Add fuel. Check grade of fuel.

Water in fuel

Remove cap and listen for sound of air entering tank. Replace cap.

Drain fuel tank and inspect filter element for water. Replace filters.

Fuel filter plugged

Improper valve clearance

Replace filter.

Check and adjust valve clearance.


4-3-2

HG31779,0000021 -19-07MAR07-1/3

020113

PN=202


Symptom

Engine Misses

Engine Does Not Develop Power

Problem

Air in fuel

Solution

Check for evidence of air in filter.

Tighten connections and bleed fuel system.

Debris in fuel or incorrect grade of fuel Check fuel tank for water. Check fuel tank strainer and fuel filter for debris.

Clean. Check grade of fuel.

Incorrect valve clearance Check and adjust valve clearance.

Fuel tank outlet strainer plugged Check fuel tank for water or debris.

Remove and clean.

Fuel filter plugged

Wrong grade of fuel

Air system restricted

Replace fuel filter.

Drain and add correct fuel.

Check air filter restriction and air filters. Clean.

Adjust valve clearance.

Engine Emits Excessive Black or

Gray Exhaust Smoke

Low Oil Pressure (Oil Pressure

Light On—Red "Stop" Flashing)

Incorrect valve clearance

Restricted air filter Check air filter restriction and air filters. Clean or replace.

Incorrect grade of fuel

Cranking speed too slow

Engine Emits Excessive Blue or

White Smoke


Wrong grade of fuel

Slow Acceleration

Detonation (Excess Engine Knock)

Low engine oil level

Abnormal Engine Noise


Check batteries and connections.



Add oil.

Low or incorrect engine oil (too thin) Add correct oil to proper level.

Engine oil diluted with fuel

Low oil level

Inspect engine oil. See your authorized dealer.

Add oil to proper level. Inspect engine oil.

Wrong viscosity oil/oil diluted with diesel fuel

Engine Overheats (Engine Coolant

Indicator Light On and Red "Stop"

Flashing)

Low coolant level

Low engine oil level

Engine overloaded, operating in incorrect gear


Change oil and see your authorized dealer.

Fill cooling system and check for leaks.

Add oil.

Reduce load.

HG31779,0000021 -19-07MAR07-2/3

4-3-3

020113

PN=203


Symptom

Excessive Fuel Consumption

Excessive Drag In Turbocharger

Rotating Members

Problem

Improper fuel

Radiator cap

Air system restricted

Solution


Replace cap.

Check filter restriction indicator and air filters. Replace.

Leakage in fuel system


Inspect. Repair.

Refill with correct fuel.

Operator holding hydraulics over relief Return control levers to neutral position.

Check for plugged air filters.

Bearing seizure or dirty or worn bearings caused by excessive temperature, unbalanced wheel, dirty oil, oil starvation, or insufficient lubrication

HG31779,0000021 -19-07MAR07-3/3

4-3-4

020113

PN=204


Electrical System

Symptom

Nothing Works

Starter Will Not Crank Engine

Engine Cranks Slowly

Starting Motor Turns, but Engine

Will Not Crank

Starting Motor Continues to Run after Engine Starts

Problem

Battery undercharged or dead

Disconnect switch

Start fuse

Battery cables making poor connections

Solution


Check switch knob position.

Replace fuse.

Clean cable connections at battery and starter solenoid.

Power circuit components

Battery undercharged or dead



Battery cables making poor connection Clean connections at battery, starter, and ground to frame.

Starter relay problem

Starter solenoid problem



Starter motor problem See your authorized dealer.

Starter motor pinion stuck in flywheel gear

Repair starter motor. See your authorized dealer.

Key switch

Major engine problem



Battery cable connections loose or corroded

Batteries undercharged

Starter armature bearings worn causing starter "drag"

Clean and/or tighten connections.


Repair or replace starter. See your authorized dealer.

Starter pinion not engaging flywheel ring gear

Starter pinion or flywheel gear teeth broken

Starter solenoid stuck




Starter not disengaging

Starter relay stuck

Key switch problem

Wiring harness shorted






4-3-5

VD76477,000122C -19-21DEC06-1/5

020113

PN=205


Symptom

Battery Using Too Much Water

Low Battery Output

Problem

High ambient temperature

Solution

Refill with distilled water.

Cracked battery case Replace battery. Install hold-down correctly.


Battery being overcharged

Low water level

Dirty or wet battery top, causing discharge

Clean battery and wipe dry.

Corroded or loose battery cable ends Clean and tighten cable end clamps.

Recharge battery. If machine has two batteries, recharge separately.

Broken or loose battery posts

See Battery Using Too Much Water in this group.

Loose fan/alternator belt or worn pulleys

Wiggle posts by hand. If posts are loose or will turn, replace battery. If machine has two batteries, replace both batteries.

Inspect belt or pulley. Adjust or replace as necessary.

Starter Solenoid Chatters

Start Aid Does Not Work

Poor connections at batteries or starter Clean connections.

Low battery charge Recharge or replace batteries.

Starter solenoid "hold-in" windings open

Engine Cranks but Does Not Start

Key switch problem

Engine circuit electrical problem

Wiring harness problem

Empty or misaligned start aid can



Check diagnostic trouble codes.


A click, not a hiss, is heard when start aid button is pushed. Replace or adjust can.


Start aid switch

Start aid solenoid

Noisy Alternator


Inspect and replace.

Worn drive belt

Pulley misaligned

Alternator bearing worn

Adjust alternator mount.

Loosen alternator belts. Turn pulley by hand. If any roughness is felt, repair alternator.


4-3-6

VD76477,000122C -19-21DEC06-2/5

020113

PN=206


Symptom

Display Monitor Does Not Work

Problem

Internal alternator

Display monitor fuse

Wiring harness

Solution


Replace fuse.


Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge

Always Indicates HIGH

Wire harness or bad connection at bulkhead connector

Gauge

Sender

Wiring harness

Torque Converter Oil Temperature

Gauge Always Indicates HOT

Gauge

Sender

Fuel Gauge Does Not Work

Wiring harness

Fuel gauge problem

Fuel gauge sender problem

Display monitor problem


Low oil level

Engine Oil Pressure Indicator

Indicates Low

Low oil viscosity

Wiring harness

Sender

Restricted engine air filter

Engine Air Filter Restriction

Indicator Light Stays On All the

Time

Engine air filter restriction switch

Voltage Indicator Light Remains On

Loose or glazed alternator belt












Stop engine. Check level.

Drain and add correct oil.



Replace filter.


Check belt. Replace if glazed; tighten if loose.

Engine rpm low Raise engine rpm. If light remains on, see your authorized dealer.

Excessive electrical load from added accessories

Remove accessories or install higher output alternator.


4-3-7

VD76477,000122C -19-21DEC06-3/5

020113

PN=207


Symptom Problem Solution

Loose or corroded electrical connections on battery, ground strap, starter or alternator

Alternator excitation diode

Inspect, clean, or tighten electrical connections.


Wiring harness problem See your authorized dealer.

Alternator problem

Display monitor problem



Hydraulic Oil Filter Restriction

Indicator Light Stays On All the

Time

Restricted hydraulic oil filter

Hydraulic oil filter restriction switch

Hydraulic Oil Temperature Indicator

Light Stays On All the Time

Wiring harness

Sender

Horn Does Not Sound

Horn

Replace filter.





Backup Alarm Does Not Sound

Blower Motor Does Not Work

Cab Work Lights Do Not Operate

Horn fuse

Horn switch

Wiring harness

Wiring harness

Backup alarm

Front or Rear Wiper Does Not Work

Wiper fuse

Wiper switch problem

Wiper motor problem


Blower motor fuse

Fan motor switch problem

Fan motor resistor problem


Fuse

Light switch problem






Replace fuse.




Replace fuse.




Replace fuse.



VD76477,000122C -19-21DEC06-4/5

4-3-8

020113

PN=208


Symptom

Driving Lights Do Not Work

Dome Light Does Not Work

Dim Lights

Return-to-Dig Does Not Operate

Problem

Cab work light relay problem


Fuse

Driving light switch problem


Bulb

Fuse

Dome light switch problem


Low battery charge

Low alternator output

Poor ground at lights

Alternator excitation/Return-to-dig fuse

Boom switch out of adjustment


Solution



Replace fuse.



Replace bulb.

Replace fuse.



Check battery connections.

Check belt tension.

Clean and tighten connections.

Replace fuse.

Check cam to see if it activates switch.

Adjust as required.


VD76477,000122C -19-21DEC06-5/5

Steering System

Symptom

Slow or Hard Steering

Erratic ("Spongy") Steering

No Response When Steering Wheel

Is Turned

Problem

Air in system

Steering lines or load sensing "LS" lines damaged (bent)

Air in system

Low or no oil

Solution

Check oil level.

Check suction hose clamps.

Check and replace.

Check oil level.

Check suction hose clamps.

Check reservoir oil level.

VD76477,000126B -19-21DEC06-1/1

4-3-9

020113

PN=209


Hydraulic System

Symptom

Reservoir Drains When Changing

Hydraulic Filter

Problem Solution

Return tube vent hole in reservoir may be plugged

Remove, inspect and repair.

Vent tube broken off inside reservoir Remove and repair.

No Loader Or Steering Hydraulics

Low oil level

Pump problem

Low Hydraulic Power

Slow Hydraulic Functions

Slow Loader And Backhoe

Hydraulics (Low Pump Output)

Low Hydraulic Power (Low

Hydraulic Pressure)

Hydraulic Function Makes

Chattering Noise

Hydraulic Oil Overheats

Obstruction in oil lines or valves

Hydraulic oil aerated

Low oil level

Low oil level

Engine rpm too low


Hose or line leakage


Low oil level (no aeration of oil)


Low oil level


Excessive load

Operator holding hydraulic system over relief

Oil levels too low in reservoir

Add oil to correct level.

Remove hydraulic filter and inspect. If filter contains excessive amounts of metal material, see your authorized dealer.

Inspect for pinched lines or stuck valve spools.

Incorrect oil; drain and refill. Suction hose has air leak; inspect and tighten.

Check oil levels.


Increase rpm or check engine speed.

(See Check Engine Speed in this manual.)


Inspect and tighten fittings.






Reduce load.

Return levers to neutral when not in use.

Check levels and add oil. Use recommended oil.


4-3-10

HG31779,0000023 -19-21DEC06-1/2

020113

PN=210


Symptom

Foaming Oil


Using low viscosity oil in hot weather Use recommended oil.

Hydraulic cooling system restricted

Plugged oil cooler

Oil level too low or too high

Clean around radiators and coolers.

Clean oil cooler.

Check oil level. Adjust to full mark on sight gauge.

Excessive Pump Noise

Incorrect type of oil

Oil maintenance not performed

Use recommended oil.

Perform correct maintenance.

Low oil level Add oil to correct level.

Hydraulic filter bypass valve chattering Replace filter. Inspect, clean, and repair.

No Response When Steering Wheel

Is Turned

Machine Turns In Opposite

Direction

Low oil level

Steering cylinder lines not connected properly

Check reservoir oil level.

Connect steering cylinder lines to opposite ports.

HG31779,0000023 -19-21DEC06-2/2

4-3-11

020113

PN=211


Transmission

Symptom Problem

Machine Will Not Move In Forward or Reverse

Low oil level in transmission

Broken drive shafts

Transmission Slippage

Machine Lacks Power or Moves

Slow

Transmission Shifts Too Slow

Solution


Inspect drive shafts and universal joints for external damage. See your authorized dealer.

Add oil.

Change oil.

Low oil level

Wrong oil grade

Oil level is low

Wrong oil, aerated oil


Change oil.

Brake dragging Check for excessive heat in brake area of axle housing after operating machine. See your authorized dealer.

Low or high oil level (aeration of oil)

Add oil or drain.

Wrong oil Change oil.

Transmission Overheats

Excessive Power Train Noise

Oil level too high or too low

Incorrect type of oil

Oil cooler air flow restricted

Transmission or coolant oil leak

Fan or shroud damaged

Engine low idle too slow

Oil level low

Check oil level and correct.

Drain and replace oil.

Inspect and clean exterior of cooler.





Fill to correct oil level.

NOTE: If any other problems are encountered which require special tools or machine knowledge to correct, see your authorized dealer.

VD76477,000125F -19-21DEC06-1/1

MFWD

Symptom

Excessive Noise

Problem

Oil level low

Solution

Fill to correct oil level.

VD76477,0001260 -19-14NOV06-1/1

4-3-12

020113

PN=212


Rear Axle

Symptom

No Differential Lock Operation

Differential Lock Will Not Release

Stuck foot switch

Problem in electrical circuit

Poor Service Brakes


Problem in electrical circuit to solenoid With engine stopped and key switch turn to accessory, activate differential lock and listen for a click from solenoid valve.

Do Differential Lock Operational

Checks.

Inspect.

Air in brake valve or lines or piston

With engine stopped and key switch on, activate differential lock and listen for a click from solenoid valve.

Bleed brakes. See Brake Bleeding

Procedure. (Section 4-1.)

Excessive Noise/Heat

Park Brake Will Not Engage

Low oil level

Low oil level

Tow release screws turned in

Check oil level and fill.

Check oil level and fill.


NOTE: If any other problems are encountered which require special tools or machine knowledge to correct, see your authorized dealer.

VD76477,0001261 -19-06MAY10-1/1

4-3-13

020113

PN=213


Air Conditioning

Symptom Problem

Air Conditioning System Does Not

Operate

A/C and heater blower fuse

Blower motor switch

Air Conditioner Does Not Cool

Interior of Cab

Solution

Replace fuse.

Check switch.

Check switch.

A/C and heater ON/OFF switch

A/C and heater relay Check relay.

Clean or replace filter.

Fresh air filter restricted

Condenser fins restricted with debris Clean condenser fins.

Recirculating air filter restricted Clean or replace filter.

Refrigerant hose kinked, pinched or collapsed

Heater or evaporator core fins restricted with dirt or dust

A/C and heater blower motor failed or operating too slowly

Warm outside air leaking into cab

Check hose routing.

Clean heater or evaporator core fins.

Check blower motor.

Inspect, repair or replace door and window seals.

Heater valve remaining open Inspect, repair, adjust or replace heater valve or cable.

Air Conditioner Runs Constantly,

Too Cold

Freeze control switch, capillary tube not positioned in evaporator properly

Interior Windows Continue to Fog


Reposition capillary tube in evaporator coil.


A/C system off Put A/C and heater ON/OFF switch to

A/C position.

Symptom Problem

Heater System Does Not Operate

A/C and heater blower fuse

Solution

Replace fuse.

Heater Does Not Warm Interior of

Cab

Blower motor switch/Blower motor fan switch (if equipped)


Check switch.


Recirculating air filter restricted

Heater hose kinked, pinched or collapsed


Re-route or re-index hoses. Replace collapsed hoses.

Heater coil fins clogged with dirt or dust

Clean heater fins.


4-3-14

VD76477,0001236 -19-21DEC06-1/2

020113

PN=214


Symptom Problem Solution

A/C and heater blower motor/Heater blower motor (if equipped) failed or operating too slowly

Heater valve remaining closed

Check motor.

Inspect, repair, adjust or replace heater valve or cable.

Interior Windows Continue to Fog


A/C system off (if equipped)


Put A/C and heater ON/OFF switch to

A/C position.

VD76477,0001236 -19-21DEC06-2/2

4-3-15

020113

PN=215

Miscellaneous—Storage

Prepare Machine for Storage

IMPORTANT: Avoid machine damage, do not use biodiesel during machine storage. When using biodiesel blends, switch to petroleum diesel for long term storage.

1. Before storage, operate engine on at least one complete tank of petroleum diesel fuel to purge the fuel system. Ensure that the fuel tank is full during storage to prevent water build up due to condensation.

NOTE: For blends up to and including B20, it is recommended that biodiesel be used within three months of its manufacture. For blends greater than B20, it is recommended that the biodiesel be used within 45 days. The poor oxidation stability characteristic of biodiesel can result in long-term storage problems. John Deere does not recommend using biodiesel in engines powering standby applications or vehicles operating on a seasonal basis. Consult your John Deere dealer or fuel supplier for additives to improve fuel storage and performance of biodiesel fuels. These additives must be added to the biodiesel close to its time of production for them to be effective.

3. Wash the machine. [Use low pressure wash operations (less than 1379 kPa (13.8 bar) (200 psi) until 30 days after receipt of machine.] Paint areas to prevent rust. Replace decals, where needed.

4. Fill fuel tank, to prevent condensation.

5. Ensure tires are properly inflated.

6. Park machine on a hard surface to prevent tires from freezing to ground.

IMPORTANT: LPS 3® Rust Inhibitor can destroy painted finish. DO NOT spray LPS 3 Rust

Inhibitor on painted surfaces.

7. Retract all hydraulic cylinders if possible. If not, coat exposed cylinder rods with LPS 3 Rust Inhibitor.

8. Apply grease at all lubrication fittings.

9. Remove batteries or disconnect terminals from batteries.

10. Store machine in a dry, protected place.

IMPORTANT: Prevent possible machine damage from unauthorized persons operating machine.

Attach a DO NOT OPERATE tag to steering wheel.

2. Repair worn or damaged parts. Install new parts, if necessary, to avoid needless delays later.

IMPORTANT: High pressure washing [greater than

1379 kPa (13.8 bar) (200 psi)] can damage freshly painted finishes. Paint should be allowed to air dry for 30 days minimum after receipt of machine before cleaning parts or machine with high pressure. Use low pressure wash operations until 30 days have elapsed.

LPS 3 Rust Inhibitor is manufactured by Holt Lloyd Corporation.

11. Put a DO NOT OPERATE tag on the steering wheel.

12. Close all vent louvers in the cab.

13. Lock all covers and doors.

VD76477,00015C2 -19-06MAR12-1/1

Monthly Storage Procedure

CAUTION: Prevent possible injury or death from asphyxiation. Engine exhaust fumes can cause sickness or death. Start engine

ONLY in a well-ventilated area.

1. Drain water and sediment from fuel tank when air temperature is above freezing.

2. Remove LPS 3® Rust Inhibitor from cylinder rods with a cleaning solvent.

LPS 3 Rust Inhibitor is a trademark of Illinois Tool Works.


VD76477,00016A3 -19-13JUN11-1/2

4-4-1

020113

PN=216

Miscellaneous—Storage

IMPORTANT: Prevent possible engine damage.

During cold temperatures, check fluidity of engine oil on dipstick. If the oil appears waxy and/or jelly-like rather than liquid, DO NOT attempt to start engine. Use external heat source to warm the crankcase until oil appears fluid.

3. Check all fluid levels. If low, check for leaks and add oil as required.

4. Check belts.

5. Check condition of all hoses and connections.

6. Check battery electrolyte level. Charge and install battery.

7. For machines with

tires

, check condition of tires and tire pressure.

For machines with

tracks

, check condition of tracks and track sag.

On crawler machines with non sealed-and-lubricated track chains, apply oil to the pin-to-bushing joints. Run machine back and forth several times.

8. Park machine on a hard surface to prevent tracks from freezing to ground.

9. Fill fuel tank.

10. Pre-lubricate turbocharger bearings, if equipped: a. Disconnect fuel shutoff fuse.

b. Crank engine for 10 seconds.

c. Connect fuel shutoff fuse.

11. Inspect engine compartment, and remove any foreign material that may have accumulated. Start engine and run until it reaches operating temperature. Run at 1/2 speed for five minutes. Do not run at fast or slow idle.

•

If engine fails to start or runs poorly after starting, change fuel filter(s). Bleed fuel system.

12. Operate all controls, levers, seat adjustments, etc.

CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from unexpected machine movement. Clear the area of all persons before running machine through the operation procedure.

13. Make sure the area is clear to allow for movement.

Cycle all hydraulic functions several times. Check condition of all hoses and connections.

14. Park the machine with cylinder rods retracted, if possible. Turn key switch to OFF.

15. Apply LPS 3 Rust Inhibitor to exposed cylinder rod areas.

VD76477,00016A3 -19-13JUN11-2/2

4-4-2

020113

PN=217

Miscellaneous—Machine Numbers

Record Product Identification Number (PIN)

Purchase Date

Product Identification Number

NOTE: Record all 13 characters of Product

Identification Number.

A—Product Identification

Number Tag

CED,OUO1079,460 -19-13JUL00-1/1

Record Engine Serial Number

Engine Serial Number

A—Engine Serial Number Tag

VD76477,0001148 -19-09NOV06-1/1

Record Transmission Serial Number

Transmission Serial Number

A—Transmission Serial

Number Tag

VD76477,0001149 -19-25OCT06-1/1

4-5-1

020113

PN=218

Miscellaneous—Machine Numbers

Record Rear Axle Housing Serial Number

Rear Axle Housing Serial Number

A—Rear Axle Serial Number

Tag

Record Mechanical Front Wheel Drive

(MFWD) Front Axle Housing Serial

Number—If Equipped

MFWD Front Axle Housing Serial Number

A—Mechanical Front Wheel

Drive (MFWD) Front Axle

Serial Number Tag

Keep Proof of Ownership

1. Maintain in a secure location an up-to-date inventory of all product and component serial numbers.

2. Regularly verify that identification plates have not been removed. Report any evidence of tampering to law enforcement agencies and order duplicate plates.

3. Other steps you can take:

- Mark your machine with your own numbering system

- Take color photographs from several angles of each machine

VD76477,000125B -19-13NOV06-1/1

VD76477,000124B -19-14DEC06-1/1

DX,SECURE1 -19-18NOV03-1/1

4-5-2

020113

PN=219

Miscellaneous—Machine Numbers

Keep Machines Secure

1. Install vandal-proof devices.

2. When machine is in storage:

- Lower equipment to the ground

- Set wheels to widest position to make loading more difficult

- Remove any keys and batteries

3. When parking indoors, put large equipment in front of exits and lock your storage buildings.

4. When parking outdoors, store in a well-lighted and fenced area.

5. Make note of suspicious activity and report any thefts immediately to law enforcement agencies.

6. Notify your John Deere dealer of any losses.

DX,SECURE2 -19-18NOV03-1/1

4-5-3

020113

PN=220

Miscellaneous—Specifications

Travel Speeds

Travel speeds are as follows for machines using 19.5L-24 rear tires:

Measurement Item

Travel Speeds

1 Forward Speed

2 Forward

3 Forward

4 Forward

1 Reverse

Speed

Speed

Speed

Speed

2 Reverse

3 Reverse (310SJ only)

Speed

Speed

NOTE: Heavily equipped machines and smaller tires may result in slower travel speeds.

Specification

5.7 km/hr

3.5 mph

10.5 km/hr

6.5 mph

21.3 km/hr

13.2 mph

35.9 km/hr

22.3 mph

7.2 km/hr

4.5 mph

13.2 km/hr

8.2 mph

21.1 km/hr

13.1 mph

Backhoe Loader Drain and Refill Capacities


Cooling System

Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine Capacity

Tier 2/Stage II Engine Capacity

Item

Engine Oil (including filter)

Measurement

Capacity

Torque Converter and Transmission

System

Rear Axle and Planetary Housing

Capacity

Capacity

MFWD Front Axle Housing

MFWD Front Wheel Planetary

Housing (each)

Fuel Tank

Hydraulic System Reservoir

Capacity

Capacity

Capacity

Capacity

Specification

25 L

6.6 gal

21 L

5.5 gal

Specification

13 L

3.5 gal

15 L

4.0 gal

18 L

4.8 gal

6.5 L

1.7 gal

1 L

1 qt

155 L

41 gal

39 L

10.3 gal

VD76477,0001150 -19-05FEB08-1/1

MD04263,000014F -19-07MAY09-1/1

4-6-1

020113

PN=221

310J Backhoe Loader Dimensions

Miscellaneous—Specifications

Item

A—Loading Height, Truck

Loading Position

Backhoe w/o Ext. Dipperstick

Backhoe w/Ext. Dipperstick

Retracted


Extended

Measurement

Height

Height

Height


4-6-2

Specification

3.33 m

10 ft 11 in.

3.38 m

11 ft 1 in.

4.24 m

13 ft 11 in.

VD76477,00010D9 -19-13JUL09-1/4

020113

PN=222


4-6-3

VD76477,00010D9 -19-13JUL09-2/4

020113

PN=223


Item

I—Transport Height


J—Overall Length, Transport

Backhoe

K—Stabilizer Width, Transport with ROPS

Backhoe

L—Stabilizer Spread, Operating

Backhoe

M—Overall Width, Stabilizer

Spread (less loader bucket)

Backhoe

Measurement

Height

Length

Width

Width

Width

N—Width Over Tires

Backhoe

O—Height to Cab/ROPS Top

Backhoe

P—Front Axle Centerline to

Bucket Cutting Edge

Heavy Duty 0.77 m

3

(1.00 yd

3

)

Width

Height

Length

Heavy Duty 0.86 m

3

(1.12 yd

3

) Length

Heavy Duty Long Lip 0.96 m

3 yd

3

)

(1.25

Multipurpose 0.77 m

3

(1.00 yd

3

)

Length

Length

Multipurpose 0.96 m

3

(1.25 yd

3

)

Q—Wheelbase

Non-Powered Front Axle

Length

Length

Mechanical Front Wheel Drive Axle Length

R—Maximum Height to Loader

Bucket Hinge Pin

Maximum Height to Loader Bucket

Hinge Pin

Height

Specification

3.43 m

11 ft 3 in.

7.09 m

23 ft 3 in.

2.18 m

7 ft 2 in.

3.10 m

10 ft 2 in.

3.53 m

11 ft 7 in.

2.08 m

6 ft 10 in.

2.74 m

9 ft 0 in.

2.03 m

6 ft 8 in.

2.03 m

6 ft 8 in.

2.18 m

7 ft 2 in.

2.15 m

7 ft 1 in.

2.20 m

7 ft 3 in.

2.11 m

6 ft 11 in.

2.14 m

7 ft 0 in.

3.38 m

11 ft 1 in.


4-6-4

VD76477,00010D9 -19-13JUL09-3/4

020113

PN=224


Item

S—Dump Clearance, Loader

Bucket at 45°

Heavy Duty 0.77 m

3

(1.00 yd

3

)

Heavy Duty 0.86 m

3

(1.12 yd

3

)

Measurement

Clearance

Heavy Duty 0.86 m

3

(1.12 yd

3

)

Clearance


3 yd

3

)

(1.25

Multipurpose 0.77 m

3

(1.00 yd

3

)

Clearance

Clearance

Multipurpose 0.96 m

3

(1.25 yd

3

)

T—Maximum Loader Bucket

Dump Angle

Maximum Loader Bucket Dump

Angle

U—Reach at Full Height, Loader

Bucket at 45°

Heavy Duty 0.77 m

3

(1.00 yd

3

)

Clearance

Angle

Distance

Distance


3 yd

3

)

(1.25

Multipurpose 0.77 m

3

(1.00 yd

3

)

Distance

Distance

Multipurpose 0.96 m

3

(1.25 yd

3

) Distance

V—Loader Bucket Rollback at Ground Level

Loader Bucket Rollback at Ground

Level

W—Dig Below Ground—Loader

Bucket Level

Heavy Duty 0.77 m

3

(1.00 yd

3

)

Angle

Depth

Heavy Duty 0.86 m

3

(1.12 yd

3

) Depth


3 yd

3

)

(1.25

Multipurpose 0.77 m

3

(1.00 yd

3

)

Depth

Depth

Multipurpose 0.96 m

3

(1.25 yd

3

) Depth

Specification

45°

785 mm

30.9 in.

767 mm

830.2 in.

809 mm

31.9 in.

818 mm

32.2 in.

818 mm

32.2 in.

40°

160 mm

6.3 in.

175 mm

6.9 in.

147 mm

5.8 in.

197 mm

7.8 in.

197 mm

7.8 in.

2.69 m

8 ft 10 in.

2.69 m

8 ft 10 in.

2.48 m

8 ft 2 in.

2.59 m

8 ft 6 in.

2.59 m

8 ft 6 in.

VD76477,00010D9 -19-13JUL09-4/4

4-6-5

020113

PN=225


310J Backhoe Loader Specifications

NOTE: Specifications and design subject to change without notice. Wherever applicable, specifications are in accordance with Standards.


Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine—John

Deere 4045H

Net Peak Power @ 2000 rpm

Cylinders

Displacement

Power

Quantity

Volume

Torque

Torque

Engine Torque Rise

Maximum Engine Net Torque @

1300 rpm

Electrical System

Alternator Rating

Oil Pan Size

Tier 2/Stage II Engine—John

Deere 4045T

Net Peak Power @ 2000 rpm

Cylinders

Displacement

Engine Torque Rise


1400 rpm

Electrical System

Alternator Rating

Engine—John Deere

4045D—Naturally Aspirated

Rated Power @ 2000 rpm

Cylinders

Displacement

Engine Torque Rise


1000 rpm

Electrical System

Alternator Rating

Voltage

Amperage

Capacity

Power

Quantity

Volume

Torque

Torque

Voltage

Amperage

Power

Quantity

Volume

Torque

Torque

Voltage

Amperage

Specification

79 hp

4

4.5 L

276 in.

3

34%

335 N·m

246 lb-ft

12-volt

90 amps

84 hp

4

4.5 L

276 in.

3

47%

367 N·m

270 lb-ft

12-volt

90 amps

0.20 L/kW

SAE gross 53 kW

71 hp

4

4.5 L

276 in.

3

37%

283 N·m

208 lb-ft

12-volt

90 amps

MD04263,0000150 -19-07JUL09-1/1

4-6-6

020113

PN=226


310J Backhoe Loader Weight

Item

Transporting

Measurement

SAE Operating Weight with ROPS Weight

Cab Added

MFWD with Tires Added

Extendible Dipperstick

Front Loader Coupler

Backhoe Bucket Coupler

Weight

Weight

Weight

Weight

Weight

Specification

6295 kg

13 880 lb

263 kg

580 lb

168 kg

370 lb

200 kg

440 lb

286 kg

630 lb

59 kg

130 lb

310J Buckets

Loader:

Heavy duty long lip

Multipurpose

Backhoe:

Standard duty

Heavy duty with lift loops

mm

457

610

305

457

610

762

mm

2180

2180

2180

Width

(In.)

(86)

(86)

(86)

Width

(in.)

(18)

(24)

(12)

(18)

(24)

(30)

m

3

Heaped Capacity

(Cu Yd)

0.86

0.86

0.76

(1.12)

(1.12)

(1.00)

m

3

Heaped Capacity

(cu ft)

0.13

0.18

(4.6)

(6.5)

0.11

0.13

(2.8)

0.18

0.25

(4.6)

(6.5)

(8.8)

MD04263,0000151 -19-20FEB09-1/1

kg

426

426

725

Weight lb

(940)

(940)

(1600)

kg

118

136

109

132

154

172

Weight

(lb)

(260)

(300)

(240)

(290)

(340)

(380)

VD76477,00010DB -19-09JUL09-1/1

4-6-7

020113

PN=227


310J Backhoe Loader Lifting

Capacities—Standard Dipperstick

Lifting capacity ratings are made with bucket hinge pin, loader bucket and stabilizers on firm, level ground. Lift capacities are hydraulically limited. Lifting capacities are

87 percent of the maximum lift over any point on the swing arc and do not exceed 75 percent of the tipping load. Angle between boom and ground is 65 degrees. Machine is equipped with 610 mm (24 in.) standard bucket, standard or extendible dipperstick, and standard equipment.

NOTE: Loader bucket on ground significantly improves side stability, therefore improving lift capacity to the side. Lift capacity over the rear is not affected.

4,859 (2204)

SWING PIVOT

3,232 (1466)

4,420 (2005)

4,446 (2017)

4,968 (2253)

7,656 (3473)

DIPPER

LIFT

WITH

BOOM

AT 65

3,123 (1417)

3,002 (1362)

2,875 (1304)

2,758 (1251)

2,645 (1200)

2,545 (1154)

2,453 (1113)

BOOM

LIFT

2,366 (1073)

2,292 (1040)

2,236 (1014)

2,223 (1008)

16

5

12

4

3

8

2

4

1

0

0

4

1

2

8

3

12

4

FEET

METERS

0

0 1

4

2

8

3

12 16

4 5

20

6 7

Lift Capacity, Backhoe with Standard Dipperstick

Based on SAE J31 (Except with Loader Bucket on Ground)

VD76477,00010DD -19-16OCT06-1/1


Capacities—Extendible Dipperstick

(Retracted)




4,437 (2013)

4,050 (1837)

4,067 (1845)

4,533 (2056)

6,525

(2960)

DIPPER

LIFT

WITH

BOOM

AT 65

2,867 (1300)

2,775 (1259)

2,662 (1207)

2,545 (1154)

2,432 (1103)

2,327 (1056)

SWING PIVOT

2,227 (1010)

2,136 (969)

BOOM

LIFT

2,058 (933)

1,984 (900)

1,931 (876)

1,914 (868)

0

0

4

1

2

8

3

12

4

16

5

12

4

3

8

2

4

1

FEET

METERS

0

0 1

4

2

8

3

12 16

4 5

20

6 7

Lift Capacity, Backhoe with Extendible Dipperstick, Retracted


VD76477,00010DE -19-16OCT06-1/1

4-6-8

020113

PN=228




(Extended)




SWING PIVOT

16

5

2,841 (1289)

1,966 (892)

12

2,723 (1235)

1,936 (878)

2,723 (1235)

2,858 (1296)

3,176 (1441)

3,919 (1778)

DIPPER

LIFT

WITH

BOOM

AT 65

1,892 (858)

8

1,844 (836)

1,792 (813)

1,740 (789)

4

1,697 (770) 0

BOOM

LIFT

1,653 (750)

1,614 (732)

4

1,579 (716)

1,557 (706) 8

1,549 (703)

1,575 (714)

4

3

2

1

0

1

2

3

12

4

FEET

METERS

0

0 1

4

2

8

3

12 16

4 5

20

6 7



VD76477,00010DF -19-16OCT06-1/1

4-6-9

020113

PN=229

310SJ Dimensions


NOTE: Specifications and design subject to change without notice. Whenever applicable, specifications are in accordance with SAE Standards. Unless otherwise noted, these specifications are based on a standard machine with 19.5L-24, 8PR, R4


A—Loading Height, Truck

Loading Position

Backhoe w/o Ext. Dipperstick Height

rear tires; 11L-16, 12PR, F3 front tires; 0.86

m

3

(1.12 cu yd) loader bucket; 610 mm (24 in.) backhoe bucket; ROPS/FOPS; full fuel tank and 79 kg (175 lb) operator.


Specification

3.43 m

11 ft 3 in.

VD76477,00010E0 -19-09JUL09-1/5

4-6-10

020113

PN=230

Item


Retracted


Extended

B—Reach from Center of

Swing Pivot



Retracted


Extended

C—Reach from Center of

Rear Axle



Retracted


Extended

D—Maximum Digging Depth



Retracted


Extended

E—Digging Depth (SAE)—610 mm (2 ft) Flat Bottom



Retracted


Extended

F—Digging Depth (SAE)—2440 mm (8 ft) Flat Bottom



Retracted


Extended

G—Ground Clearance Minimum

Ground Clearance Minimum


Measurement

Height

Height

Distance

Distance

Distance

Distance

Distance

Distance

Depth

Depth

Depth

Distance

Distance

Distance

Distance

Distance

Distance

Clearance


4-6-11

Specification

3.43 m

11 ft 3 in.

4.29 m

14 ft 1 in.

5.56 m

18 ft 3 in.

5.66 m

18 ft 7 in.

6.68 m

21 ft 11 in.

6.63 m

21 ft 9 in.

6.73 m

22 ft 1 in.

7.72 m

25 ft 4 in.

4.42 m

14 ft 6 in.

4.55 m

14 ft 11 in.

5.61 m

18 ft 5 in.

4.37 m

14 ft 4 in.

4.50 m

14 ft 9 in.

5.56 m

18 ft 3 in.

4.06 m

13 ft 4 in.

4.19 m

13 ft 9 in.

5.33 m

17 ft 6 in.

330 mm

13 in.

VD76477,00010E0 -19-09JUL09-2/5

020113

PN=231


Item

H—Bucket Rotation

Bucket Rotation

I—Transport Height


Measurement

Rotation

Height


Retracted

J—Overall Length, Transport

Backhoe

K—Stabilizer Width, Transport

Backhoe

L—Stabilizer Spread, Operating

Backhoe

M—Overall Width, Stabilizer

Spread (less loader bucket)

Backhoe

N—Width Over Tires

Backhoe

O—Height to Cab/ROPS Top

Backhoe

P—Front Axle Centerline to

Bucket Cutting Edge

Heavy Duty 0.77 m

3

(1.00 yd

3

)

Height

Length

Width

Width

Width

Width

Height

Length

Heavy Duty 0.86 m

3

(1.12 yd

3

) Length


3 yd

3

)

(1.25

Heavy Duty 1.00 m

3

(1.31 yd

3

)

Length

Length

Multipurpose 0.96 m

3

(1.25 yd

3

)

Multipurpose 1.00 m

3

(1.31 yd

3

)

Q—Wheelbase

Non-Powered Front Axle

Length

Length

Length

Mechanical Front Wheel Drive Length

3.53 m

11 ft 7 in.

2.18 m

7 ft 2 in.

2.79 m

9 ft 2 in.

2.03 m

6 ft 8 in.

2.03 m

6 ft 8 in.

2.18 m

7 ft 2 in.

2.03 m

6 ft 8 in.

2.20 m

7 ft 3 in.

2.15 m

7 ft 1 in.

2.11 m

6 ft 11 in.

2.14 m

7 ft 0 in.

Specification

190°

3.51 m

11 ft 6 in.

3.48 m

11 ft 5 in.

7.16 m

23 ft 6 in.

2.18 m

7 ft 2 in.

3.10 m

10 ft 2 in.


4-6-12

VD76477,00010E0 -19-09JUL09-3/5

020113

PN=232


Item

R—Maximum Height to Loader

Bucket Hinge Pin

Maximum Height to Loader Bucket

Hinge Pin

S—Dump Clearance, Loader

Bucket at 45°

Heavy Duty 0.77 m

3

(1.00 yd

3

)

Measurement

Height

Clearance

Heavy Duty 0.86 m

3

(1.12 yd

3

) Clearance


3 yd

3

)

(1.25

Heavy Duty 1.00 m

3

(1.31 yd

3

)

Clearance

Clearance

Multipurpose 0.96 m

3

(1.25 yd

3

)

Multipurpose 1.00 m

3

(1.31 yd

3

)

T—Maximum Loader Bucket

Dump Angle

Maximum Loader Bucket Dump

Angle

U—Reach at Full Height, Loader

Bucket at 45°

Heavy Duty 0.77 m

3

(1.00 yd

3

)

Clearance

Clearance

Angle

Distance

Heavy Duty 0.86 m

3

(1.12 yd

3

) Distance


3 yd

3

)

(1.25

Heavy Duty 1.00 m

3

(1.31 yd

3

)

Distance

Distance

Multipurpose 0.96 m

3

(1.25 yd

3

)

Multipurpose 1.00 m

3

(1.31 yd

3

)

Distance

Distance

V—Loader Bucket Rollback at Ground Level

Loader Bucket Rollback at Ground

Level

W—Dig Below Ground—Loader

Bucket Level

Heavy Duty 0.77 m

3

(1.00 yd

3

)

Angle

Depth

Heavy Duty 0.86 m

3

(1.12 yd

3

) Depth

Specification

3.4 m

11 ft 2 in.

2.69 m

8 ft 10 in.

2.69 m

8 ft 10 in.

2.48 m

8 ft 2 in.

2.64 m

8 ft 8 in.

2.62 m

8 ft 7 in.

2.62 m

8 ft 7 in.

45°

785 mm

30.9 in.

767 mm

30.2 in.

911 mm

35.9 in.

765 mm

30.1 in.

818 mm

32.2 in.

818 mm

32.2 in.

40°

160 mm

6.3 in.

175 mm

6.9 in.


4-6-13

VD76477,00010E0 -19-09JUL09-4/5

020113

PN=233


Item


3 yd

3

)

(1.25

Heavy Duty 1.00 m

3

(1.31 yd

3

)

Measurement

Depth

Depth

Multipurpose 0.96 m

3

(1.25 yd

3

) Depth

Multipurpose 1.00 m

3

(1.31 yd

3

) Depth

Specification

147 mm

5.8 in.

206 mm

8.1 in.

185 mm

7.3 in.

185 mm

7.3 in.

310SJ Backhoe Loader Weight

Item

Transporting

Measurement

SAE Operating Weight with ROPS Weight

Cab Added

MFWD with Tires Added

Extendible Dipperstick

Front Loader Coupler

Weight

Weight

Weight

Weight

Backhoe Bucket Coupler Weight

Specification

6580 kg

14 510 lb

263 kg

580 lb

220 kg

485 lb

222 kg

490 lb

286 kg

630 lb

63 kg

138 lb

VD76477,00010E0 -19-09JUL09-5/5

MD04263,0000153 -19-20FEB09-1/1

4-6-14

020113

PN=234


310SJ Buckets

Loader:

Heavy duty long lip

Multipurpose

Backhoe:

Standard duty

Heavy duty with lift loops

Severe duty

Ditch cleaning

mm

610

305

457

610

610

762

914

457

610

610

762

914

mm

2180

2340

2180

2340

Width

In.

86

92

86

92

Width

In.

24

30

36

18

12

18

24

24

24

24

30

36

m

3

Heaped Capacity

Cu Yd

0.86

1.12

1.00

0.76

0.96

1.30

1.00

1.25

m

3

Heaped Capacity

Cu Ft

0.21

7.5

0.09

0.14

0.21

0.25

0.28

0.35

0.14

0.21

0.25

0.28

0.35

8.8

10.0

12.5

10.0

12.5

5.1

7.5

3.3

5.1

7.5

8.8

kg

426

476

725

762

Weight lb

940

1050

1600

1680

kg

159

117

151

180

216

202

231

164

192

206

215

231

Weight

VD76477,00010E3 -19-13JUL09-1/1

lb

350

258

334

396

476

444

510

362

424

455

475

510

310SJ Backhoe Loader Lifting

Capacities—Standard Dipperstick




16

5

5,585 (2533)

3,745 (1699)

5,664 (2569)

5,785 (2624)

6,609 (2998)

11,389 (5166)

DIPPER

LIFT

WITH

BOOM

AT 65

3,658 (1659)

3,537 (1604)

3,406 (1545)

3,276 (1486)

3,154 (1431)

SWING PIVOT

3,045 (1381)

2,945 (1336)

BOOM

LIFT

2,854 (1295)

2,780 (1261)

2,723 (1235)

2,732 (1239)

0

12

4

3

8

2

4

1

0

4

1

2

8

3

12

4

FEET

METERS

0

0 1

4

2

8

3

12

4

16

5

20

6 7

Lift Capacity, Backhoe with Standard Dipperstick


VD76477,00010E4 -19-16OCT06-1/1

4-6-15

020113

PN=235




(Retracted)

4,384 (1989)

3,119 (1415)

4,981

(2259)

5,078 (2303)

5,712 (2591)

8,334

(3780)

DIPPER

LIFT

WITH

BOOM

AT 65

3,119 (1415)

3,049 (1383)

2,958 (1342)

2,862 (1298)

2,771 (1257)

2,684 (1217)

SWING PIVOT

2,606 (1182)

BOOM

LIFT

2,536 (1150)

2,484 (1127)

2,462 (1117)

2,514 (1140)

3,306 (1500)

16

5

12

4

3

8

2

4

1

0

0

4

1

2

8

3

12

4

FEET

METERS

0

0 1

4

2

8

3

12

4

16

5

20

6 7



VD76477,00010E5 -19-16OCT06-1/1



(Extended)

16

5

2,674 (1213)

2,184 (991)

12

2,945 (1335)

3,155 (1431)

2,197 (997)

2,188 (992)

8

2,158 (979)

3,373 (1530)

3,691 (1674)

4,390 (1991)

DIPPER

LIFT

WITH

BOOM

AT 65

BOOM

LIFT

2,127 (965)

2,092 (949)

4

2,053 (931)

0

2,023 (918)

1,997 (906)

4

1,975 (896)

1,971 (894)

8

1,988 (902)

2,058 (933) 12

4

3

2

1

0

1

2

3

4

FEET

METERS

0

0 1

4

2

8

3

12

4

16

5

20

6 7



VD76477,00010E6 -19-16OCT06-1/1

4-6-16

020113

PN=236

Index

A

B

Page

Accessory outlets, 12-volt........................................ 2-1-21

Accumulator

Ride control, checking.......................................... 4-1-18

Acid

Battery, check electrolyte level............................... 3-7-2

Adjustment

Air

Engine valve clearance........................................ 3-10-1

Cleaner elements clean ...............................3-3-7, 3-3-8

Air cleaner, engine

Elements, replace ........................................3-9-3, 3-9-4

Intake hose ............................................................ 3-8-1

Air conditioning ........................................................ 4-3-14

Controls....................................................2-1-13, 2-1-17

Receiver-dryer ....................................................... 4-1-3

Alternator

Indicator ................................................................. 2-1-3

Precaution.............................................................. 4-1-5

Anti-theft security system

Configuration.......................................................... 2-1-4

Operation ............................................................... 2-1-6

Attachments

Adding safely ......................................................... 1-3-4

Operating safely..................................................... 1-3-4

Axle

Front, non-powered

Lubricate oscillating pivot and steering

pivots ....................................................3-4-9, 3-4-10

Lubricate wheel bearings ................................... 3-3-9

MFWD

Change oil, housing.......................................... 3-10-2

Change oil, planetary ....................................... 3-10-2

Check oil, housing .............................................. 3-7-1

Check oil, planetary............................................ 3-7-1

Lubricate drive shaft splines............................... 3-3-8

Lubricate oscillating pivot and universal joints ... 3-4-9

Operating.......................................................... 2-2-24

Troubleshooting................................................ 4-3-12

Rear

Oil change ........................................................ 3-10-3

Operating differential lock................................. 2-2-24

Troubleshooting................................................ 4-3-13

Axles

Oil specification.................................................... 3-1-11

Backhoe

Adjustment

Boom lock........................................................... 4-1-2

Boom-to-dipperstick pin bolt torque.................... 3-8-1

Auxiliary hydraulic function

Adjusting flow control valve .............................. 2-2-18

Auxiliary hydraulic functions

Operation.......................................................... 2-2-19

Page

Auxiliary hydraulic selective flow

Operation.......................................................... 2-2-18

Bucket teeth installation ....................................... 4-1-27

Counterweights

Frame ............................................................... 4-1-16

Liquid, in front tires ........................................... 4-1-17

Lubricate

Pivots and cylinders .................................3-4-7, 3-4-8

Stabilizers........................................................... 3-4-6

Operating

Auxiliary hydraulic functions ............................. 2-2-19

Auxiliary hydraulic selective flow ...................... 2-2-18

Boom lock......................................................... 2-2-10

ISO excavator two-lever controls ..................... 2-2-13

John Deere two-lever controls.......................... 2-2-12

Stabilizers........................................................... 2-2-9

Swing lock ........................................................ 2-2-11

Swing lock pin .................................................. 2-2-11

Stabilizers

Lubrication.......................................................... 3-4-6

Reversing feet .................................................. 4-1-16

Backhoe coupler

Grease .......................................................3-4-10, 3-5-1

Lubricate ....................................................3-4-10, 3-5-1

Safety signs ........................................................... 1-5-3

Backhoe Loader

Weight

310J.................................................................... 4-6-7

310SJ ............................................................... 4-6-14

Backover accidents

Avoid ...................................................................... 1-3-3

Ballast

Counterweights, front of frame............................. 4-1-16

Liquid, in front tires............................................... 4-1-17

Batteries

Boost starting ......................................................... 4-1-6

Using battery charger............................................. 4-1-6

Battery

Acid

Burns from battery acid ...................................... 3-7-2

Electrolyte level check ........................................... 3-7-2

Explosion ............................................................... 3-7-2

Handling, checking, servicing ................................ 4-1-7

Rating..................................................................... 4-1-8

Removal................................................................. 4-1-9

Replacement.......................................................... 4-1-8

Terminals................................................................ 3-7-2

Bearings, front wheel................................................. 3-9-1

Belt inspection ........................................................... 3-9-5

Bleed fuel system .................................................... 4-1-21

Bleediing procedure

Brakes.................................................................. 4-1-22

Bolt and screw torque values

Metric ................................................................... 4-1-30

Unified inch .......................................................... 4-1-29

Boom

Lowering .............................................................. 4-1-20

Index-1


020113

PN=1

Index

Page

Boom lock

Backhoe ................................................................. 4-1-2

Brake

Park brake

Check ............................................................... 4-1-20

Service brake

Inspection, external ............................................ 4-1-1

Brakes

Bleediing procedure ............................................. 4-1-22

Break-in

Engine.................................................................... 3-6-1

Break-In engine oil..................................................... 3-1-6

Breather, fuel

Replace.................................................................. 3-9-6

Breather, hydraulic reservoir...................................... 3-9-2

Bucket

Backhoe

Installing teeth .................................................. 4-1-27

Front loader

Changing buckets............................................. 4-1-15

Bucket specification

310J ....................................................................... 4-6-7

310SJ................................................................... 4-6-15

Bulb replacement, halogen lights ............................ 4-1-13

C

D

E

Page

Cooling system

Check..................................................................... 3-4-3

Draining.................................................... 3-11-1, 3-11-2

Filling........................................................ 3-11-3, 3-11-4

Service safely......................................................... 1-4-1

COOLSCAN PLUS test kit....................................... 3-3-10

Counterweights

Frame................................................................... 4-1-16

Liquid, in front tires............................................... 4-1-17

Coupler, backhoe

Grease .......................................................3-4-10, 3-5-1

Lubricate ....................................................3-4-10, 3-5-1

Operating ............................................................. 2-2-21

Coupler, loader

Grease ................................................................... 3-4-9

Coupler, Loader

Operating ............................................................. 2-2-22

Cruise control ............................................................ 2-2-9

Cylinder service ....................................................... 4-1-27

Cab air filters ...................................................3-3-4, 3-9-4

Capacities

Drain and refill........................................................ 4-6-1

Checklist .................................................................... 3-2-7

Codes

Standard display monitor ....................................... 2-1-9

Cold weather

Machine warm-up .................................................. 2-2-6

Starting................................................................... 2-2-4

Controls

Backhoe, ISO excavator two-lever

Operation.......................................................... 2-2-13

Backhoe, John Deere two-lever

Operation.......................................................... 2-2-12

Steering console

Locations .......................................................... 2-1-14

Steering wheel tilt lever........................................ 2-1-20

Coolant

Add coolant extender ........................................... 3-3-10

Additional information .......................................... 3-1-15

Check.........................................................3-3-10, 3-9-8

Diesel engine ....................................................... 3-1-12

Drain ........................................................ 3-11-1, 3-11-2

Heater .................................................................... 2-2-5

Hoses..................................................................... 4-1-4

John Deere Cool-Gard II Coolant Extender ......... 3-1-13

Level ...................................................................... 3-4-3

Sample................................................................... 3-8-6

Supplemental additives........................................ 3-1-14

Test ...................................................................... 3-3-10

Testing.................................................................. 3-1-16

Warm temperature climates ................................. 3-1-14

Decals

Safety..................................................................... 1-5-1

Defroster controls ........................................2-1-13, 2-1-17

Diagnose malfunctions

Troubleshooting procedure .................................... 4-3-1

Diagnostic trouble codes ........................................... 2-1-9

Messages, standard display monitor (SDM) .......... 2-1-8

Diesel fuel........................................................3-1-1, 3-1-3

Sample................................................................... 3-8-6

Diesel fuel, testing

Testing Diesel Fuel................................................. 3-1-4

Differential lock ........................................................ 2-2-24

Dipperstick, extendible

Lock

Operation.......................................................... 2-2-17

Drain engine coolant.................................... 3-11-1, 3-11-2

Drain Intervals for Diesel Engine Coolant

Diesel Engine Coolant, Drain Intervals ................ 3-1-13

Driving

Steering wheel tilt lever........................................ 2-1-20

Driving the machine................................................... 2-2-7

Effect of Cold Weather on Diesel Engines

Diesel Engines, Cold Weather Effect ..................... 3-1-5

Electrical

Accessory outlets, 12-volt .................................... 2-1-21

Troubleshooting ..................................................... 4-3-5

Element

Primary

Cleaning and inspecting ..................................... 4-1-3

Secondary

Inspecting and cleaning...................................... 4-1-3

Emissions control warranty statement............................ -3

Enable/disable switch

Pilot control .......................................................... 2-1-15


Index-2

020113

PN=2

Index

Page

Engine

Air filter restriction indicator.................................... 2-1-3

Alternator voltage indicator .................................... 2-1-3

Break-in........................................................2-2-3, 3-6-1

Coolant heater ....................................................... 2-2-5

Coolant temperature gauge ................................... 2-1-3

Crankcase vent tube .............................................. 3-8-6

Filter service intervals

Tier 2/Stage II ..................................................... 3-1-8

Tier 3/Stage III A .............................................. 3-1-10

Hood, opening and closing .................................... 3-2-5

Identification........................................................... 3-2-2

Oil change.............................................................. 3-8-3

Oil check ................................................................ 3-4-2

Oil filter................................................................... 3-8-3

Oil pressure indicator ............................................. 2-1-3

Oil specification

Break-In.............................................................. 3-1-6

Tier 2 and Stage II .............................................. 3-1-7

Tier 3 and Stage III A ......................................... 3-1-9

Serial number......................................................... 4-5-1

Starting................................................................... 2-2-3

Troubleshooting ..................................................... 4-3-2

Valve clearance adjust ......................................... 3-10-1

Engine speed

Control knob......................................................... 2-1-16

Engine speed control knob ............................2-1-16, 2-2-9

Extendible dipperstick

Lock operation ..................................................... 2-2-17

Operating ............................................................. 2-2-16

Extendible dipperstick w/ attachments

Operating ............................................................. 2-2-17

F

G

H

Page

Changing buckets ................................................ 4-1-15

Lubrication ...................................................3-4-5, 3-4-6

Operating ............................................................. 2-2-23

Ride control

Checking accumulator...................................... 4-1-18

Discharge pressure for service......................... 4-1-19

Front wheel drive


Fuel

Diesel ...........................................................3-1-1, 3-1-3

Filter

Replace element ......................................3-8-4, 3-8-5

Handling and storing .............................................. 3-1-2

Level gauge ........................................................... 2-1-3

Lubricity.................................................................. 3-1-1

Tank

Capacity ............................................................. 3-2-5

Drain water and sediment .................................. 3-8-2

Fuel breather

Replace.................................................................. 3-9-6

Fuel filter

Auxliary water separator ........................................ 3-8-5

Fuel Filter

Auxiliary water separator ....................................... 3-3-6

Fuel system, bleed .................................................. 4-1-21

Fuses

Location ................................................................. 4-1-9

Feet, stabilizer

Reversing............................................................. 4-1-16

Filter

Cab air

Clean and replace elements.....................3-3-4, 3-9-4

Engine air cleaner

Replace elements.....................................3-9-3, 3-9-4

Engine oil

Replace element ................................................ 3-8-3

Fuel

Replace element ......................................3-8-4, 3-8-5

Hydraulic

Replace element ................................................ 3-9-6

Filter service intervals

Tier 2/Stage II ........................................................ 3-1-8

Tier 3/Stage III A .................................................. 3-1-10

Fires, prevent............................................................. 1-2-4

Fluid analysis test kit ................................................. 3-2-6

Fluid sample

Taking samples .................................................... 4-1-14

Front loader

Boom service lock

Inspect.............................................................. 4-1-30

Operate .............................................................. 3-2-5

Gauge

Engine coolant temperature................................... 2-1-3

Fuel level................................................................ 2-1-3

Transmission and torque converter oil

temperature.......................................................... 2-1-3

Grease

Alternative and synthetic lubricants ....................... 3-1-6

Axle

MFWD drive shaft splines .................................. 3-3-8

MFWD oscillating pivot and universal joints ....... 3-4-9

Non-powered front wheel bearings .................... 3-3-9

Axle, non-powered front

Oscillating pivot and steering pivots ....................................................3-4-9, 3-4-10

Backhoe


Stabilizers and cylinders..................................... 3-4-6

Coupler, loader....................................................... 3-4-9

Extreme pressure and multipurpose .................... 3-1-12

Front loader

Pivots.................................................................. 3-4-5

Pivots, bucket ..................................................... 3-4-6

Ground speeds .......................................................... 4-6-1

Hand trottle .............................................................. 2-1-16

Handholds

Use correctly .......................................................... 1-3-1


Index-3

020113

PN=3

Index

Page

Hardware torque values

Metric ................................................................... 4-1-30

Unified inch .......................................................... 4-1-29

Hazards

Work Site ............................................................... 1-3-2

Heater controls ............................................2-1-13, 2-1-17

High-pressure oils

Avoid ...................................................................... 1-2-3

Hood, opening and closing ........................................ 3-2-5

Horn button..................................................2-1-12, 2-1-16

Hose

Crankcase ventilation............................................. 3-8-6

Engine air intake .................................................... 3-8-1

Radiator upper and lower....................................... 4-1-4

Hour meter................................................................. 3-2-1

Hydraulic

Backhoe auxiliary function

Flow control valve adjustment .......................... 2-2-18

Backhoe auxiliary functions

Operation.......................................................... 2-2-19

Backhoe auxiliary selective flow

Operation.......................................................... 2-2-18

Oil

Change............................................................. 3-10-1

Filter, replace element ........................................ 3-9-6

Oil filter restriction indicator.................................... 2-1-3


Reservoir

Breather, replace ................................................ 3-9-2

Fill screen, inspect and clean ........................... 3-10-4

Oil level check .................................................... 3-4-1

Troubleshooting ................................................... 4-3-10

Hydraulic oil ............................................................. 3-1-11

Hydraulic pressure

Pilot control system.............................................. 4-1-19

I

Indicator

Engine air filter restriction ...................................... 2-1-3

Engine alternator voltage ....................................... 2-1-3

Engine oil pressure ................................................ 2-1-3

Hydraulic oil filter restriction ................................... 2-1-3

Park brake.............................................................. 2-1-3

Ride control.......................................................... 2-1-12

Seat belt................................................................. 2-1-3

Stop........................................................................ 2-1-3

Water in fuel (WIF) ............................................... 2-1-14

Injection

Nozzle .................................................................... 4-1-5

Pump...................................................................... 4-1-5

Inspection, pre-start................................................... 2-2-1

Instrument

Check before starting............................................. 2-2-2

Page

JDLink in-line fuse

Unswitched power.................................................. 4-1-9

Job timer

Standard display monitor ..................................... 2-1-11

L

Lever

Steering wheel tilt................................................. 2-1-20

Levers and pedals ..................................................... 2-1-1

Lifting ....................................................................... 2-2-25

Lifting capacities

310J

Extendible dipperstick ..............................4-6-8, 4-6-9

Standard dipperstick........................................... 4-6-8

310SJ

Extendible dipperstick ...................................... 4-6-16

Standard dipperstick......................................... 4-6-15

Lights ....................................................................... 2-1-14

Loader

Boom service lock

Inspect.............................................................. 4-1-30

Operate .............................................................. 3-2-5

Changing buckets ................................................ 4-1-15

Lubrication ...................................................3-4-5, 3-4-6

Operating ............................................................. 2-2-23

Ride control

Checking accumulator...................................... 4-1-18

Discharge pressure for service......................... 4-1-19

Loader backhoe

Operating ............................................................. 2-2-21

Loader coupler

Operating ............................................................. 2-2-22

Lowering boom

Without electrical power....................................... 4-1-20

Lubricants


Lubricate

Axle

MFWD drive shaft splines .................................. 3-3-8

MFWD oscillating pivot and universal joints ....... 3-4-9

Non-powered front wheel bearings .................... 3-3-9

Axle, non-powered front

Oscillating pivot and steering pivots ....................................................3-4-9, 3-4-10

Backhoe


Stabilizers and cylinders..................................... 3-4-6

Coupler, loader....................................................... 3-4-9

Front loader

Pivots.................................................................. 3-4-5

Pivots, bucket ..................................................... 3-4-6

Lubricity of diesel fuel ................................................ 3-1-1

M

J

JDLink........................................................................ 4-1-9

Machine

Maintenance, preparation for ................................. 3-2-1

Index-4


020113

PN=4

Index

Transmission and torque converter oil

N

Page

Warm-up

Cold weather ...................................................... 2-2-6

Normal conditions............................................... 2-2-5

Machine modifications

Avoid ...................................................................... 1-2-2

Machine movement

Unintended

Prevent .....................................................1-3-1, 1-3-2

Machine tipover

Avoid ...................................................................... 1-3-3

Machine, inspect........................................................ 1-2-2

Main menu


Maintenance

Chart ...................................................................... 3-2-1

Preparation for ....................................................... 3-2-1

Record ................................................................... 3-2-7

Mechanical front wheel drive


Metric bolt and screw torque values ........................ 4-1-30

MFWD

Lubricate

Change axle housing oil ................................... 3-10-2

Change planetary housing oil........................... 3-10-2

Check axle housing oil level ............................... 3-7-1

Check planetary housing oil level....................... 3-7-1

Drive shaft splines .............................................. 3-3-8

Oscillating pivot and universal joints .................. 3-4-9

Operation ............................................................. 2-2-24


MFWD front axle housing

Serial number......................................................... 4-5-2

Monitor

Codes..................................................................... 2-1-9

Engine air filter restriction indicator........................ 2-1-3

Engine alternator voltage indicator ........................ 2-1-3

Engine coolant temperature gauge........................ 2-1-3

Engine oil pressure indicator.................................. 2-1-3

Fuel level gauge..................................................... 2-1-3

Hydraulic oil filter restriction indicator .................... 2-1-3

Job timer .............................................................. 2-1-11

machine settings .................................................. 2-1-11

Main menu ............................................................. 2-1-8

Normal display ....................................................... 2-1-7

Seat belt/park brake indicator ................................ 2-1-3

Standard display .................................................... 2-1-2

Stop indicator ......................................................... 2-1-3

temperature gauge............................................... 2-1-3

Monitor functions ....................................................... 2-1-3

Monitor options ........................................................ 2-1-10

Motor service ........................................................... 4-1-27

Normal display


Oil

O

P

Page


Axle sample ........................................................... 3-8-6

Change

Engine ................................................................ 3-8-3

Hydraulic reservoir ........................................... 3-10-1

MFWD front axle housing................................. 3-10-2

MFWD planetary housing................................. 3-10-2

Planetary housing............................................. 3-10-3

Rear axle housing ............................................ 3-10-3

Transmission ...................................................... 3-9-7

Engine sample ....................................................... 3-7-4

Hydraulic sample ................................................... 3-8-6

Level

Engine ................................................................ 3-4-2

Hydraulic reservoir ............................................. 3-4-1

MFWD housing................................................... 3-7-1

MFWD planetary housing................................... 3-7-1

Transmission ...................................................... 3-5-1

Level, rear axle ...................................................... 3-7-4

Specification

Axles................................................................. 3-1-11

Hydraulic system .............................................. 3-1-11

Mechanical front wheel drive............................ 3-1-11

Transmission .................................................... 3-1-11

Transmission sample ............................................. 3-8-6

Oil, engine

Tier 2 and Stage II ................................................. 3-1-7

Tier 3 and Stage III A ............................................. 3-1-9

Operating

Use special care .................................................... 1-3-4

Operating backhoe coupler ..................................... 2-2-21

Operating loader coupler ......................................... 2-2-22

Operating tips

Lifting ................................................................... 2-2-25

Operation qualification............................................... 1-2-1

Operational checkout procedures.............................. 4-2-1

Operator convenience features ................................. 1-1-1

Park brake

Check operation of............................................... 4-1-20

Indicator ................................................................. 2-1-3

Switch .................................................................. 2-1-12

Park brake switch ............................................1-3-1, 1-3-2

Parking

Machine ............................................................... 2-2-25

Parts, moving

Stay clear ............................................................... 1-2-2

Pattern select switch................................................ 2-1-15

Pedal

Sixth-function ....................................................... 2-2-19

Pedals and levers ...................................................... 2-1-1

Pilot controls .......................................................... 2-1-1

Periodic maintenance chart ....................................... 3-2-1


Index-5

020113

PN=5

Index

Page

Pilot control enable/disable switch........................... 2-1-15

Pilot control system

Discharge hydraulic pressure .............................. 4-1-19

Pilot control wrist rest

Adjusting .............................................................. 4-1-25

Pilot controls .............................................................. 2-1-1

Adjusting wrist rest............................................... 4-1-25

Pins, metal

Drive safely ............................................................ 1-4-2

Planetary housing

Oil change............................................................ 3-10-3

Pre-start inspection.................................................... 2-2-1

Pump

Service of pumps ................................................. 4-1-27

R

Rear axle housing

Serial number......................................................... 4-5-2

Receiver-dryer

Check sight glasses ............................................... 4-1-3

Recognize

Safety, information ................................................. 1-2-1

Regulator precaution ................................................. 4-1-5

Relays

Location ................................................................. 4-1-9

Required parts ........................................................... 3-2-9

Ride control

Checking accumulator ......................................... 4-1-18

Discharge pressure for service ............................ 4-1-19

Operation ............................................................... 2-2-6

Switch and indicator............................................. 2-1-12

Riders

Keep off machine ................................................... 1-3-3

Right side console

Functions ............................................................. 2-1-12

Roads

Operating or traveling ............................................ 1-3-4

ROPS

Inspect ................................................................... 1-3-5

Keep properly installed ........................................ 4-1-28

Maintain ................................................................. 1-3-5

S

Safety

Clean debris from machine .................................... 1-2-6

Operator's seat ...................................................... 1-3-1

Park and prepare for service safely ....................... 1-4-1

Protective equipment ............................................. 1-2-2

Safety features .......................................................... 1-1-1

Safety signs ............................................................... 1-5-1

Backhoe coupler .................................................... 1-5-3

Safety, Avoid High-Pressure Fluids

Avoid High-Pressure Fluids ................................... 1-2-3

Safety, information

Recognize .............................................................. 1-2-1

Sample test ports

Fluid sample......................................................... 4-1-14

Page

Screen, hydraulic reservoir fill

Inspect and clean................................................. 3-10-4

Seat

Air suspension

Controls ............................................................ 2-1-19

Switch, height adjustment ................................ 2-1-13

Mechanical suspension

Controls ............................................................ 2-1-19

Seat belt

Indicator ................................................................. 2-1-3

Use and maintain ................................................... 1-3-1

Secondary and primary element

Cleaning................................................................. 4-1-3

Secondary exits ....................................................... 2-1-18

Security system, anti-theft

configuration .......................................................... 2-1-4 operation ................................................................ 2-1-6

Serial number

Engine.................................................................... 4-5-1

Machine ................................................................. 4-5-1

MFWD front axle housing ...................................... 4-5-2

Rear axle housing .................................................. 4-5-2

Transmission.......................................................... 4-5-1

Service

Control valves, cylinders, pumps, and motors ..... 4-1-27

Ride control, discharge pressure ......................... 4-1-19

Service brake

Inspection............................................................... 4-1-1

Service interval checklist ........................................... 3-2-7

Service record ........................................................... 3-2-7

Settings

Standard display monitor ..................................... 2-1-11

Sixth-function pedal ................................................. 2-2-19

Specification

310SJ................................................................... 4-6-10

Backhoe boom-to-dipperstick pin bolt torque......... 3-8-1

Hardware torque .................................................. 4-1-28

Oil

Axle .................................................................. 3-1-11

Hydraulic .......................................................... 3-1-11

Mechanical front wheel drive............................ 3-1-11

Transmission .................................................... 3-1-11

Oil, differential ...................................................... 3-1-11

Oil, hand-operated cab tilt hydraulic pump .......... 3-1-11

Oil, park brake...................................................... 3-1-11

Wheel fastener torque............................................ 3-3-4

Specifications

310J .................................................. 4-6-2, 4-6-6, 4-6-9

310SJ.......................................................4-6-15, 4-6-16

Speed ........................................................................ 4-6-1

Stabilizers

Lubricate ................................................................ 3-4-6

Operating ............................................................... 2-2-9

Reversing feet...................................................... 4-1-16

Stage II

Identification........................................................... 3-2-2

Standard Display Function ........................................ 2-1-3

Standard display monitor...................2-1-2, 2-1-10, 2-1-11


Index-6

020113

PN=6

Index

Page

Main menu

Settings ............................................................ 2-1-11

Settings ................................................................ 2-1-11

Standard display monitor (SDM)

Diagnostic trouble codes popup messages ........... 2-1-8

Starting fluid, cold weather start ................................ 2-2-4

Starting system check ............................................. 4-1-14

Starting the engine .................................................... 2-2-3

Steering

Toe-in, check and adjust ...................................... 4-1-26

Steering system......................................................... 4-3-9

Steps

Use correctly .......................................................... 1-3-1

Stop indicator............................................................. 2-1-3

Storage

Machine ................................................................. 4-4-1

Monthly .................................................................. 4-4-1

Storing fuel ................................................................ 3-1-2

Swing Lock Pin

Operating ............................................................. 2-2-11

Switch

Air suspension seat height adjustment ................ 2-1-13

Defroster, heater, and air condi-

tioner ......................................................2-1-13, 2-1-17

Differential lock switch ......................................... 2-2-24

Locations, steering console ................................. 2-1-14

Mechanical front wheel drive (MFWD)................. 2-2-24

Park brake............................................................ 2-1-12

Ride control.......................................................... 2-1-12

Turn signal ........................................................... 2-1-14

Warning lights ...................................................... 2-1-14

Work and drive lights ........................................... 2-1-14

Switch functions....................................................... 2-1-12

T

U

V

W

Page

Oil level .................................................................. 3-5-1


Serial number......................................................... 4-5-1


Transporting

On a trailer ........................................................... 2-2-26

Towing.................................................................. 2-2-27

Travel speeds ............................................................ 4-6-1

Traveling

On public roads...................................................... 1-3-4

Troubleshooting

Electrical system .................................................... 4-3-5

Troubleshooting procedure........................................ 4-3-1

Unified inch bolt and screw torque values ............... 4-1-29

Valve

Backhoe auxiliary hydraulic function flow control.. 2-2-18

Hydraulic control valve service ............................ 4-1-27

Vent tube, engine ...................................................... 3-8-6

Teeth, backhoe bucket............................................. 4-1-27

Tire

Pressure................................................................. 3-3-2

Pressure check ...................................................... 3-3-1

Toe-in

Check and adjust ................................................. 4-1-26

Toolbox

Removal................................................................. 4-1-9

Torque charts

Metric ................................................................... 4-1-30

Unified inch .......................................................... 4-1-29

Torque converter

Oil temperature gauge ........................................... 2-1-3

Towing ..................................................................... 2-2-27

Transmissioin

Oil temperature gauge ........................................... 2-1-3

Transmission

Oil change.............................................................. 3-9-7

Warm-up

Machine, cold weather ........................................... 2-2-6

Machine, normal conditions ................................... 2-2-5

Warranty statement

Emissions control........................................................ -3

Water separator

Auxiliary, fuel filter ........................................3-3-6, 3-8-5

Drain ............................................................3-3-6, 3-4-4

Weight

Backhoe Loader

310J.................................................................... 4-6-7

310SJ ............................................................... 4-6-14

Welding repairs

Make safely............................................................ 1-4-2

Wheel bearings, front ................................................ 3-9-1

Wheel fasteners......................................................... 3-3-4

Windows

Rear ..................................................................... 2-1-18

Side, secondary exits........................................... 2-1-18

Work site hazards

Avoid ...................................................................... 1-3-2

Wrist rest

Adjusting .............................................................. 4-1-25

Index-7

020113

PN=7

Index

Index-8

020113

PN=8

Backhoe Loader310j And 310sjengines

Backhoe Loader

310J and 310SJ

Engines 4045DT060,

4045HT054 and 4045TT094

OPERATOR'S MANUAL

310J and 310SJ Backhoe Loaders

Engines 4045DT060, 4045HT054 and 4045TT094

OMT210365 ISSUE B3 (ENGLISH)

WARNING

Worldwide Construction

And Forestry Division

Introduction

Foreword

IMPORTANT

Emissions Control Warranty Statement—U.S. and Canada

Technical Information Feedback Form

Contents

Safety—Safety And Operator Conveniences

Safety—General Precautions

Safety—Operating Precautions

Safety—Maintenance Precautions

Safety—Safety Signs

Operation—Operator’s Station

Operation—Operating The Machine

i

Maintenance—Machine

Maintenance—Periodic Maintenance

Maintenance—As Required

Maintenance—Every 10 Hours or Daily

ii

Maintenance—Every 50 Hours

Maintenance—Every 250 Hours

Maintenance—Every 500 Hours

Maintenance—Every 1000 Hours

Maintenance—Every 2000 Hours

Maintenance—Every 6000 Hours

Miscellaneous—Machine

iii

Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout

Miscellaneous—Troubleshooting

Miscellaneous—Storage

Miscellaneous—Machine Numbers

Miscellaneous—Specifications

iv

Safety—Safety And Operator Conveniences

Safety and Operator Convenience Features

1-1-1

Safety—General Precautions

Recognize Safety Information

Follow Safety Instructions

Operate Only If Qualified

Wear Protective Equipment

Avoid Unauthorized Machine Modifications

Inspect Machine

Stay Clear of Moving Parts

1-2-2

Avoid High-Pressure Oils

Avoid High-Pressure Fluids

Work In Ventilated Area

Prevent Fires

1-2-4

Prevent Battery Explosions

Handle Chemical Products Safely

Dispose of Waste Properly

Prepare for Emergencies

Clean Debris from Machine

1-2-6

Safety—Operating Precautions

Use Steps and Handholds Correctly

Start Only From Operator's Seat

Use and Maintain Seat Belt

Prevent Unintended Machine Movement

Prevent Unintended Machine Movement—If

Equipped With Pilot Controls

Avoid Work Site Hazards

1-3-2

Keep Riders Off Machine

Avoid Backover Accidents

Avoid Machine Tipover